Anda di halaman 1dari 261

Part 1 System Description

Table of Contents .........................................................................................


Chapter 1 An Introduction to BTS30 ............................................................
1.1 System Overview ..............................................................................
1.2 System Characteristics .....................................................................
1.2.1 Integrated RF Component Technology ....................................
1.2.2 Mature RF Technology .............................................................
1.2.3 Advanced E-Abis Technology ..................................................
1.2.4 Powerful O&M Functions ..........................................................
1.3 Application Merits..............................................................................
1.3.1 Wide Coverage .........................................................................
1.3.2 Expenditure Reduction .............................................................
1.3.3 Smooth Evolution .....................................................................
1.3.4 Multiple Transmission Modes ...................................................
1.4 Structure Overview ...........................................................................
1.5 Main Functions ..................................................................................
1.5.1 Basic Software Relative Functions ...........................................
1.5.2 Basic Hardware Relative Functions..........................................
1.6 Technical Indices ..............................................................................
Chapter 2 Hardware Architecture .................................................................
2.1 Overview ...........................................................................................
2.2 CDU Frame .......................................................................................
2.2.1 CDU ..........................................................................................
2.2.2 EDU ..........................................................................................
2.2.3 ECDU .......................................................................................
2.2.4 SCU ..........................................................................................
2.3 TRX Frame .......................................................................................
2.3.1 TRX ..........................................................................................
2.3.2 PBU ..........................................................................................
2.4 Common Resource Frame ................................................................
2.4.1 PSU ..........................................................................................
2.4.2 PMU..........................................................................................
2.4.3 TMU ..........................................................................................
2.4.4 TES ...........................................................................................
2.4.5 ASU board ................................................................................
2.4.6 ABB ..........................................................................................
2.4.7 ABA ..........................................................................................
2.5 Other Parts of the Cabinet ................................................................
2.5.1 TDU ..........................................................................................
2.5.2 FMU ..........................................................................................

i
1-1
1-1
1-2
1-2
1-2
1-2
1-3
1-3
1-3
1-4
1-4
1-4
1-4
1-7
1-8
1-8
1-9
2-1
2-1
2-2
2-2
2-3
2-4
2-5
2-5
2-5
2-9
2-11
2-11
2-11
2-13
2-16
2-17
2-19
2-20
2-20
2-20
2-26

2.5.3 Switch Box ................................................................................


2.5.4 Fan Box ....................................................................................
2.5.5 Air Box ......................................................................................
2.6 Antenna and Feeder System ............................................................
2.6.1 Antenna ....................................................................................
2.6.2 Feeder ......................................................................................
2.6.3 Lightning Arrester .....................................................................
2.6.4 Tower-top Amplifier (Optional) ..................................................
2.7 Power Supply System .......................................................................
2.7.1 Overview ...................................................................................
2.7.2 Overall Structure .......................................................................
2.8 Environment Monitoring System .......................................................
2.8.1 Outlook of Environment Monitoring Instrument ........................
2.8.2 Function Provided by Environment Monitoring Instrument .......
2.8.3 Environment Monitoring Instrument Inputs ...............................
2.8.4 Alarm Indicators........................................................................
2.8.5 Executing Devices ....................................................................
2.8.6 Communication .........................................................................
2.9 Lightning Protection System .............................................................
2.9.1 Lightning Protection for DC Power Supply ...............................
2.9.2 Lightning Protection for AC Power Supply ...............................
2.9.3 Lightning Protection for Trunk Cables ......................................
Chapter 3 Software Architecture ..................................................................
3.1 Overview ...........................................................................................
3.2 Signaling Control Processing (SCP) Program ..................................
3.3 Baseband Signal Processing Program .............................................
3.4 Operation and Maintenance Program ...............................................
Chapter 4 External Interfaces .......................................................................
4.1 Abis Interface ....................................................................................
4.1.1 Introduction ...............................................................................
4.1.2 Physical Layer ..........................................................................
4.1.3 Data Link Layer ........................................................................
4.1.4 Layer 3-Traffic Management ....................................................
4.1.5 Layer 3-Operation and Maintenance ........................................
4.2 Um Interface .....................................................................................
4.2.1 Introduction ...............................................................................
4.2.2 Interface Protocol Model ...........................................................
4.2.3 Physical Layer ..........................................................................
4.2.4 Data Link Layer ........................................................................
4.2.5 Signaling Layer .........................................................................
Chapter 5 Functions and Performance ........................................................

2-26
2-27
2-27
2-27
2-28
2-29
2-29
2-30
2-31
2-31
2-32
2-34
2-34
2-35
2-35
2-36
2-36
2-37
2-37
2-38
2-39
2-40
3-1
3-1
3-2
3-4
3-5
4-1
4-1
4-1
4-6
4-7
4-8
4-12
4-14
4-14
4-15
4-15
4-19
4-23
5-1

5.1 Networking Function .........................................................................


5.1.1 E1 Networking ..........................................................................
5.1.2 SDH Networking .......................................................................
5.1.3 Networking for Satellite Transmission ......................................
5.2 Main RF Function..............................................................................
5.3 Baseband Processing .......................................................................
5.3.1 Channel Types Supported ........................................................
5.3.2 Channel Combinations Supported ............................................
5.4 Signaling Processing ........................................................................
5.5 Operation and Maintenance ..............................................................
5.5.1 Software Loading ......................................................................
5.5.2 Abis Interface Management......................................................
5.5.3 Air Interface Management ........................................................
5.5.4 Testing Management ................................................................
5.5.5 Status Management .................................................................
5.5.6 Processing of Event Reports ....................................................
5.5.7 Equipment Management ..........................................................
5.5.8 Site Configuration .....................................................................
5.5.9 Tracing Operations ...................................................................
5.5.10 Other Functions ......................................................................
5.6 System Indices ..................................................................................
5.7 Radio Interface Indices .....................................................................
5.7.1 Receivers ..................................................................................
5.7.2 Transmitters..............................................................................
Chapter 6 Configuration and Typical Application .........................................
6.1 Configuration .....................................................................................
6.1.1 Cell Configuration .....................................................................
6.1.2 Configuration of the Common Resource Frame .......................
6.1.3 Configuration of the TRX Frame ...............................................
6.1.4 Full Configuration of CDU Frame .............................................
6.1.5 Configuration of the Antenna ....................................................
6.2 Typical Configuration ........................................................................
6.2.1 S(2) Configuration ....................................................................
6.2.2 S(2/2/2) Configuration ..............................................................
6.2.3 O(3) Configuration ....................................................................
6.2.4 O(4) Configuration ....................................................................
Appendix A Abbreviations ............................................................................

5-1
5-1
5-3
5-4
5-6
5-7
5-8
5-8
5-8
5-11
5-12
5-13
5-14
5-15
5-16
5-16
5-17
5-19
5-19
5-20
5-21
5-22
5-22
5-25
6-1
6-1
6-1
6-2
6-3
6-3
6-4
6-4
6-4
6-5
6-7
6-8
A-1

Part 2 BTS Maintenance Terminal System


Table of Contents .........................................................................................
Chapter 1 Overview ......................................................................................

i
1-1

1.1 Brief Introduction to BTS Terminal Maintenance ..............................


1.1.1 BTS Logic Objects ....................................................................
1.1.2 Status of BTS Logic Objects .....................................................
1.2 Brief Introduction to BTS Terminal Maintenance Operations............
1.2.1 User Login ................................................................................
1.2.2 Interface Operation ...................................................................
Chapter 2 Site Maintenance .........................................................................
2.1 Overview ...........................................................................................
2.2 Site Administrationship .....................................................................
2.3 Start Site Operation ..........................................................................
2.4 View Resource ..................................................................................
2.5 Force Load SW .................................................................................
2.6 SW Activate ......................................................................................
2.7 Site Hierarchical Reset .....................................................................
2.8 Site Test ............................................................................................
2.9 Site Environment Monitoring .............................................................
Chapter 3 Cell Maintenance .........................................................................
3.1 Overview ...........................................................................................
3.2 Cell Attributes Management ..............................................................
3.3 Cell OpStart ......................................................................................
3.4 Change Cell Administrative State .....................................................
3.5 Cell Performance Test ......................................................................
Chapter 4 BT Maintenance ..........................................................................
4.1 Overview ...........................................................................................
4.2 OpStart BT ........................................................................................
4.3 Change BT Administrative State .......................................................
4.4 BT Reinitialization .............................................................................
4.5 BT Test .............................................................................................
Chapter 5 Channel Maintenance..................................................................
5.1 Overview ...........................................................................................
5.2 Channel Attributes Management ......................................................
5.3 OpStart Channel ...............................................................................
5.4 Change Channel Administrative State ..............................................
5.5 Loop Test ..........................................................................................
Chapter 6 RC Maintenance ..........................................................................
6.1 Overview ...........................................................................................
6.2 RC Attributes Management...............................................................
6.3 OpStart RC .......................................................................................
6.4 Change RC Administrative State ......................................................
6.5 RC Reinitialization .............................................................................
Chapter 7 Board Maintenance .....................................................................

1-1
1-1
1-1
1-2
1-2
1-3
2-1
2-1
2-1
2-3
2-4
2-5
2-6
2-8
2-9
2-10
3-1
3-1
3-1
3-5
3-5
3-6
4-1
4-1
4-1
4-2
4-3
4-4
5-1
5-1
5-1
5-3
5-3
5-4
6-1
6-1
6-1
6-2
6-3
6-4
7-1

7.1 Overview ...........................................................................................


7.1.1 Board Maintenance Function ....................................................
7.1.2 Board Maintenance Operations ................................................
7.2 Board Reset ......................................................................................
7.3 OpStart Board ...................................................................................
7.4 Board Self-test ..................................................................................
7.5 Change Board Administrative State ..................................................
7.6 Board Information .............................................................................
7.7 Loop Test ..........................................................................................
7.8 Board Alarm ......................................................................................
7.9 MCK Clock Operation .......................................................................
7.10 Set MDC Parameters ......................................................................
7.11 CDU Operation ...............................................................................

7-1
7-1
7-2
7-4
7-5
7-5
7-6
7-7
7-7
7-8
7-9
7-10
7-11

Part 3 BTS Maintenance


Table of Contents .........................................................................................
Chapter 1 Routine Maintenance Instructions ...............................................
1.1 Routine Maintenance Overview ........................................................
1.1.1 Purpose of Routine Maintenance .............................................
1.1.2 Routine Maintenance Classification .........................................
1.1.3 BTS Routine Maintenance Record & Instructions ....................
1.2 Weekly Maintenance Instructions .....................................................
1.3 Monthly Maintenance Instructions ....................................................
1.4 Quarterly Maintenance Instructions ..................................................
1.5 Yearly Maintenance Instructions .......................................................
1.6 Return Loss, VSWR and Reflection Coefficient ................................
Chapter 2 Fault Analysis and Location.........................................................
2.1 Communication Fault ........................................................................
2.1.1 Introduction to Mobile Stations Search for the Network ...........
2.1.2 Call Failure ...............................................................................
2.1.3 No Voice Heard after the Call is Connected .............................
2.1.4 Unidirectional Talk ....................................................................
2.1.5 Poor Voice Quality ....................................................................
2.1.6 Conversation Interruption .........................................................
2.1.7 Cross Talk ................................................................................
2.1.8 Mobile Station Frequently Disconnected from the Network......
2.1.9 Immediate Assignment Rejection .............................................
2.2 Network Fault ....................................................................................
2.2.1 Mobile Station Fails to Find a Network .....................................
2.2.2 Mobile Station Fails to Access the Network .............................
2.2.3 MS Frequent Location Updating ...............................................

i
1-1
1-1
1-1
1-1
1-2
1-8
1-9
1-9
1-10
1-11
2-1
2-1
2-1
2-2
2-5
2-6
2-7
2-8
2-9
2-9
2-10
2-11
2-11
2-12
2-15

2.3 Loading Fault ....................................................................................


2.3.1 Software Loading Failure ..........................................................
2.3.2 Base Station Initialization Failure .............................................
2.4 Signaling Fault ..................................................................................
2.4.1 OML Link Blocked ....................................................................
2.4.2 RSL Link Blocked .....................................................................
2.5 Antenna and Feeder System Fault ...................................................
2.6 Optical Channel Fault .......................................................................
2.7 Board Fault .......................................................................................
2.7.1 CDU ..........................................................................................
2.7.2 EDU ..........................................................................................
2.7.3 PBU ..........................................................................................
2.7.4 PMU..........................................................................................
2.7.5 PSU ..........................................................................................
2.7.6 TES ...........................................................................................
2.7.7 TEU ..........................................................................................
2.7.8 TMU ..........................................................................................
2.7.9 TRX ..........................................................................................

2-16
2-16
2-18
2-20
2-20
2-21
2-22
2-23
2-24
2-24
2-26
2-29
2-31
2-34
2-36
2-37
2-39
2-42

HUAWEI
1. System Description
2. BTS Maintenance Terminal System
3. BTS Maintenance

M900/M1800 Base Transceiver Station (BTS30)


User Manual
V300R002

M900/M1800 Base Transceiver Station (BTS30)


User Manual
Manual Version

T2-030128-20040310-C-4.03

Product Version

V300R002

BOM

31013228

Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. provides customers with comprehensive technical support
and service. Please feel free to contact our local office or company headquarters.

Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.


Address: Administration Building, Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.,
Bantian, Longgang District, Shenzhen, P. R. China
Postal Code: 518129
Website: http://www.huawei.com
Email: support@huawei.com

Copyright 2004 Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

All Rights Reserved


No part of this manual may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any
means without prior written consent of Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Trademarks

, HUAWEI, C&C08, EAST8000, HONET,

, ViewPoint, INtess, ETS, DMC,

TELLIN, InfoLink, Netkey, Quidway, SYNLOCK, Radium,


M900/M1800,
TELESIGHT, Quidview, Musa, Airbridge, Tellwin, Inmedia, VRP, DOPRA, iTELLIN,
HUAWEI OptiX, C&C08 iNET, NETENGINE, OptiX, iSite, U-SYS, iMUSE, OpenEye,
Lansway, SmartAX, infoX, TopEng are trademarks of Huawei Technologies Co.,
Ltd.
All other trademarks mentioned in this manual are the property of their respective
holders.

Notice
The information in this manual is subject to change without notice. Every effort has
been made in the preparation of this manual to ensure accuracy of the contents, but
all statements, information, and recommendations in this manual do not constitute
the warranty of any kind, express or implied.

About This Manual


Release Notes
The product version that corresponds to the manual is M900/M1800 Base Transceiver
Station (BTS30) V300R002.

Related Manuals
The following manuals provide more information about the M900/M1800 Base
Transceiver Station (BTS30).
Manual

Content

M900/M1800 Base Transceiver


Station (BTS30) User Manual

It provides an overall introduction to the BTS30, including


the software structure, hardware structure, applications,
technical specifications and maintenance method.

M900/M1800 Base Transceiver Station


(BTS30) Installation Manual

It provides information for the system installation, including


the hardware installation and software installation.

Organization of the Manual


M900/M1800 Base Transceiver Station (BTS30) User Manual describes such contents
of the BTS30 as the product features, architecture, and working principle of each
functional part. It includes 3 volumes and their contents are listed as follows:
System Description gives a general description of the BTS30, including the key
features, technical indices, functions, and operation and maintenance structure, and
users can get the basic information of BTS30.
BTS Maintenance Terminal System is used to guide users how to operate the local
maintenance console. It describes every operation by means of interface, and helps
users to get familiar with the routine operation of the BTS30, and learn about its running
status.
BTS Maintenance introduced the routine maintenance instructions, faulty analysis and
location of BTS30.

Target Readers

The manual is intended for the following readers:


z

GSM engineers and technicians

Telecommunication management staff

System engineer of GSM mobile network

Conventions
This document uses the following conventions:

I. General conventions
Convention

Description

Arial

Normal paragraphs are in Arial.

Arial Narrow

Warnings, cautions, notes and tips are in Arial Narrow.

II. Symbols
Eye-catching symbols are also used in this document to highlight the points worthy of
special attention during the operation. They are defined as follows:
Caution: Means reader be extremely careful during the operation.
Note: Means a complementary description.

Environmental Protection
This product has been designed to comply with the requirements on environmental
protection. For the proper storage, use and disposal of this product, national laws and
regulations must be observed.

HUAWEI

M900/M1800 Base Transceiver Station (BTS30)


User Manual

Part 1 System Description

User Manual
M900/M1800 Base Transceiver Station (BTS30)

System Description
Table of Contents

Table of Contents
Chapter 1 An Introduction to BTS30 ........................................................................................... 1-1
1.1 System Overview ............................................................................................................... 1-1
1.2 System Characteristics ...................................................................................................... 1-2
1.2.1 Integrated RF Component Technology................................................................... 1-2
1.2.2 Mature RF Technology............................................................................................ 1-2
1.2.3 Advanced E-Abis Technology ................................................................................. 1-2
1.2.4 Powerful O&M Functions ........................................................................................ 1-3
1.3 Application Merits............................................................................................................... 1-3
1.3.1 Wide Coverage........................................................................................................ 1-3
1.3.2 Expenditure Reduction............................................................................................ 1-4
1.3.3 Smooth Evolution .................................................................................................... 1-4
1.3.4 Multiple Transmission Modes.................................................................................. 1-4
1.4 Structure Overview ............................................................................................................ 1-4
1.5 Main Functions................................................................................................................... 1-7
1.5.1 Basic Software Relative Functions.......................................................................... 1-8
1.5.2 Basic Hardware Relative Functions ........................................................................ 1-8
1.6 Technical Indices ............................................................................................................... 1-9
Chapter 2 Hardware Architecture ................................................................................................ 2-1
2.1 Overview ............................................................................................................................ 2-1
2.2 CDU Frame........................................................................................................................ 2-2
2.2.1 CDU......................................................................................................................... 2-2
2.2.2 EDU......................................................................................................................... 2-3
2.2.3 ECDU ...................................................................................................................... 2-4
2.2.4 SCU......................................................................................................................... 2-5
2.3 TRX Frame ........................................................................................................................ 2-5
2.3.1 TRX ......................................................................................................................... 2-5
2.3.2 PBU ......................................................................................................................... 2-9
2.4 Common Resource Frame .............................................................................................. 2-11
2.4.1 PSU ....................................................................................................................... 2-11
2.4.2 PMU ...................................................................................................................... 2-11
2.4.3 TMU....................................................................................................................... 2-13
2.4.4 TES ....................................................................................................................... 2-16
2.4.5 ASU board............................................................................................................. 2-17
2.4.6 ABB ....................................................................................................................... 2-19
2.4.7 ABA ....................................................................................................................... 2-20
2.5 Other Parts of the Cabinet ............................................................................................... 2-20
2.5.1 TDU ....................................................................................................................... 2-20

User Manual
M900/M1800 Base Transceiver Station (BTS30)

System Description
Table of Contents

2.5.2 FMU....................................................................................................................... 2-26


2.5.3 Switch Box............................................................................................................. 2-26
2.5.4 Fan Box ................................................................................................................. 2-27
2.5.5 Air Box................................................................................................................... 2-27
2.6 Antenna and Feeder System ........................................................................................... 2-27
2.6.1 Antenna ................................................................................................................. 2-28
2.6.2 Feeder ................................................................................................................... 2-29
2.6.3 Lightning Arrester.................................................................................................. 2-29
2.6.4 Tower-top Amplifier (Optional) .............................................................................. 2-30
2.7 Power Supply System...................................................................................................... 2-31
2.7.1 Overview ............................................................................................................... 2-31
2.7.2 Overall Structure ................................................................................................... 2-32
2.8 Environment Monitoring System...................................................................................... 2-34
2.8.1 Outlook of Environment Monitoring Instrument..................................................... 2-34
2.8.2 Function Provided by Environment Monitoring Instrument ................................... 2-35
2.8.3 Environment Monitoring Instrument Inputs ........................................................... 2-35
2.8.4 Alarm Indicators .................................................................................................... 2-36
2.8.5 Executing Devices................................................................................................. 2-36
2.8.6 Communication ..................................................................................................... 2-37
2.9 Lightning Protection System ............................................................................................ 2-37
2.9.1 Lightning Protection for DC Power Supply............................................................ 2-38
2.9.2 Lightning Protection for AC Power Supply............................................................ 2-39
2.9.3 Lightning Protection for Trunk Cables................................................................... 2-40
Chapter 3 Software Architecture ................................................................................................. 3-1
3.1 Overview ............................................................................................................................ 3-1
3.2 Signaling Control Processing (SCP) Program................................................................... 3-2
3.3 Baseband Signal Processing Program .............................................................................. 3-4
3.4 Operation and Maintenance Program ............................................................................... 3-5
Chapter 4 External Interfaces....................................................................................................... 4-1
4.1 Abis Interface ..................................................................................................................... 4-1
4.1.1 Introduction.............................................................................................................. 4-1
4.1.2 Physical Layer ......................................................................................................... 4-6
4.1.3 Data Link Layer ....................................................................................................... 4-7
4.1.4 Layer 3 - Traffic Management ................................................................................. 4-8
4.1.5 Layer 3 - Operation and Maintenance .................................................................. 4-12
4.2 Um Interface .................................................................................................................... 4-14
4.2.1 Introduction............................................................................................................ 4-14
4.2.2 Interface Protocol Model ....................................................................................... 4-15
4.2.3 Physical Layer ....................................................................................................... 4-15
4.2.4 Data Link Layer ..................................................................................................... 4-19
4.2.5 Signaling Layer...................................................................................................... 4-23

ii

User Manual
M900/M1800 Base Transceiver Station (BTS30)

System Description
Table of Contents

Chapter 5 Functions and Performance ....................................................................................... 5-1


5.1 Networking Function .......................................................................................................... 5-1
5.1.1 E1 Networking ......................................................................................................... 5-1
5.1.2 SDH Networking...................................................................................................... 5-3
5.1.3 Networking for Satellite Transmission..................................................................... 5-4
5.2 Main RF Function............................................................................................................... 5-6
5.3 Baseband Processing........................................................................................................ 5-7
5.3.1 Channel Types Supported ...................................................................................... 5-8
5.3.2 Channel Combinations Supported .......................................................................... 5-8
5.4 Signaling Processing ......................................................................................................... 5-8
5.5 Operation and Maintenance ............................................................................................ 5-11
5.5.1 Software Loading .................................................................................................. 5-12
5.5.2 Abis Interface Management .................................................................................. 5-13
5.5.3 Air Interface Management..................................................................................... 5-14
5.5.4 Testing Management ............................................................................................ 5-15
5.5.5 Status Management .............................................................................................. 5-16
5.5.6 Processing of Event Reports................................................................................. 5-16
5.5.7 Equipment Management ....................................................................................... 5-17
5.5.8 Site Configuration.................................................................................................. 5-19
5.5.9 Tracing Operations................................................................................................ 5-19
5.5.10 Other Functions................................................................................................... 5-20
5.6 System Indices................................................................................................................. 5-21
5.7 Radio Interface Indices .................................................................................................... 5-22
5.7.1 Receivers .............................................................................................................. 5-22
5.7.2 Transmitters .......................................................................................................... 5-25
Chapter 6 Configuration and Typical Application...................................................................... 6-1
6.1 Configuration...................................................................................................................... 6-1
6.1.1 Cell Configuration.................................................................................................... 6-1
6.1.2 Configuration of the Common Resource Frame ..................................................... 6-2
6.1.3 Configuration of the TRX Frame ............................................................................. 6-3
6.1.4 Full Configuration of CDU Frame............................................................................ 6-3
6.1.5 Configuration of the Antenna .................................................................................. 6-4
6.2 Typical Configuration ......................................................................................................... 6-4
6.2.1 S(2) Configuration ................................................................................................... 6-4
6.2.2 S(2/2/2) Configuration ............................................................................................. 6-5
6.2.3 O (3) Configuration.................................................................................................. 6-7
6.2.4 O(4) Configuration................................................................................................... 6-8
Appendix A Abbreviations ...........................................................................................................A-1

iii

User Manual
M900/M1800 Base Transceiver Station (BTS30)

System Description
Chapter 1 An Introduction to BTS30

Chapter 1 An Introduction to BTS30


1.1 System Overview
In a GSM network, a Base Transceiver Station (BTS) belongs to the radio part of the
base station subsystem, i.e. transmitting functions are performed by BTS. Figure 1-1
shows that a BTS is a set of transceiver equipment that serves a certain cell and is
controlled by the BSC (base station controller).
Um interface
PSTN
ISDN
PSPDN

TUP , ISUP

M900/M1800 BSC
MS

Other MSC/VLR

M900 BTS

A interface
M900/M1800 MSC/VLR
MAP
MAP

LAN/WAN

M1800 BTS

M900 BTS
HLR/AUC/EIR

MS
M900 BTS

SMC&VM

OMC

MSC: Mobile Switching Center

BSC: Base Station Controller

SMC: Short Message Center

HLR: Home Location Register

BTS: Base Transceiver Station

VM: Voice Mailbox

AUC: AUthentication Center

MS: Mobile Station

OMC: Operation/Maintenance Center

VLR: Visitor Location Register

EIR: Equipment Identify Register

Figure 1-1 Position of the BTS in the GSM system


A BTS connects with the BSC via the Abis interface. The air interface (Um interface),
is used to realize the radio transmission between the BTS and the MS as well as the
associated control functions.
The BTS processes messages on layer 1, layer 2, and non-transparent transmission
layer 3 on radio links and performs the related control functions, including:
z

Interfacing with the BSC

Radio channel management

Operation and maintenance functions

Signaling protocol functions

1-1

User Manual
M900/M1800 Base Transceiver Station (BTS30)

System Description
Chapter 1 An Introduction to BTS30

1.2 System Characteristics


The M900/M1800 BTS30 is designed as a typical all-in-one BTS by taking full
consideration of the requirements of capacity, configuration, installation, power supply,
transmission, and services. Its characteristics are as follows.

1.2.1 Integrated RF Component Technology


z

Expansion based on the inheritance of the investment: BTS expansion can make
the utmost of all the antenna and feeder parts.

Modular structure with good performance: RF combiner, divider and low noise
amplifier are integrated in CDU (Combining and Distribution Unit). All parts for
TRX processing including baseband processing, RF processing, power
amplification and power supply are all integrated in one TRX (Transceiver unit).
Modular structure can reduce internal cable connections, improve system
reliability and facilitate installation and maintenance.

Intelligent CDU: Fine monitor and control function, excellent O&M, level 2
standing wave ratio alarm, low noise amplifier alarm, TTA (Tower Top Amplifier)
alarm, TTA power supply. Auto protection against emergency: Close
transmission power when transmit path antenna feeder is abnormal; power off to
bypass LNA (Low Noise Amplifier) when TTA is abnormal so as to ensure
normal system operation. Receive gain can be adjusted via remote control to
ensure the sensitivity of the receive system.

1.2.2 Mature RF Technology


z

RF hopping and baseband frequency hopping are provided to improve system


anti-interference capability. It has good performance in practical application.

Advanced digital RF technology is adopted to raise batch consistency,


manufacture scalability and stability of the RF system.

1.2.3 Advanced E-Abis Technology


The E-Abis (Enhanced Abis) supports various transmission modes and complex
topologies, e.g. SDH, E1, microwave, satellite, etc.
The E-Abis includes the following techniques:
z

APL (Advanced Phase Locking) technique solves the problem of clock jittery, by
using high-precision clock and characteristic software phase lock technique. The
problems such as SDH clock phase jittery, signal out of lock during transmission
via satellite are solved.

1-2

User Manual
M900/M1800 Base Transceiver Station (BTS30)
z

System Description
Chapter 1 An Introduction to BTS30

With a tolerance of up to a bit error rate of 1E-4, i.e. 2 levels higher than the
common 1E-6 bit error rate, a better and smooth voice quality can be obtained
even in transmission through microwave, and satellite.

The system can tolerate a intermittent link failure of less than 2 seconds, which
makes the BTS30 more suitable for applications in unstable conditions such as
SDH transmission switching, microwave, satellite transmission etc.

Protection against long transmission delay on the Abis to support satellites


networking.

1.2.4 Powerful O&M Functions


BTS30 can perform the following O&M functions: software downloading, BTS object
attribute configuration management, equipment management and running status
monitoring.
z

Local end maintenance: provide man machine interface (MMI), and implement
maintenance, monitoring and management to all objects of the BTS through the
local end maintenance console.

Remote end maintenance: O&M network is made in the GSM system. The
authorized user can use any workstation in the network via the remote
maintenance console to perform remote O&M to BTS NEs in the system.

System state monitoring provides system running indices indication, resource


state indication.

Security management provides MS login authentication, command authority


restriction, unsecured operation indication and user group management.

Test: self-test of functions, loop-back test.

Upgrade: automatically check the system for upgrade. System upgrading can be
performed via remote loading. The system can be restored to its previous
version if system upgrading fails.

1.3 Application Merits


1.3.1 Wide Coverage
z

When configuring TRX, the nominal value of transmission power at the cabinet
feeder port is 40W. When PBU (Power Boost Unit) is equipped, the nominal
value of transmission power can reach 80W; When EDU (Enhanced Duplexer
Unit) is adopted, the RF signal combining consumption can be reduced and the
BTS coverage can be expanded.

Support dual timeslot expansion function (Theoretically, a maximum coverage of


120km can be supported).

1-3

User Manual
M900/M1800 Base Transceiver Station (BTS30)

System Description
Chapter 1 An Introduction to BTS30

1.3.2 Expenditure Reduction


z

It supports multiplexing of 15:1, hence greatly reducing transmission


expenditure.

Transmission equipment such as SDH is integrated, providing a solution for


future upgrade and wideband radio access and reducing transmission equipment
investment.

High reliability: Centralized power supply while providing power to various


modules in a distributed way. BTS30 and BTS312 can provide DC +24V, DC
-48V and AC 220V to satisfy different power supply requirement.

1.3.3 Smooth Evolution


z

Mixed dual band plug-in of 900MHz and 1800MHz modules of 6 cells.

GPRS (General Packet Radio Service), which helps to realize smooth evolution
from 2G to 2.5G.

1.3.4 Multiple Transmission Modes


z

Multiple built-in transmission modes: 75 /E1, 120/E1 and SDH. The BTS has
powerful transmission adaptability.

1.4 Structure Overview


I. Logical Structure
In the GSM system, the BTS30 functions as a radio relay, connected with the MS via
the Um interface on one side and to the BSC via the Abis interface on the other side.
The logical structure of the BTS30 is shown in Figure 1-2.
External Alarm

Abis

Um

TDU

CBUS/TBUS/DBUS

ABB&ABA

BSC

E1
Fiber(Optinal)

PSU

TRX

TMU
TRX
TEU

TRX

TTA

TTA

TTA

TTA

TTA

CDU
FHBUS

CDU

TES

PMU

TTA

CDU

FMU
Common Unit

Signaling Processor Unit

Figure 1-2 BTS30 system structure

1-4

Antenna Feeder Unit

User Manual
M900/M1800 Base Transceiver Station (BTS30)

System Description
Chapter 1 An Introduction to BTS30

As shown in Figure 1-2, the hardware of BTS30 includes the following three
functional parts: common unit, carrier unit and antenna unit.
Common Unit
The common unit consists of the Timing/transmission and Management Unit (TMU),
the Timing Distribution Unit (TDU), the Transmission Extension Unit (TEU), the
Transmission Extension power Supply unit (TES), the Fan Monitor Unit (FMU), the
Power Supply Unit (PSU), the Power Monitoring Unit (PMU), the Abis Bypass board
(ABB), Abis Bypass Assistant board (ABA), the switch box, the fan box and the air
box.
z

TMU is the basic transmission and control function entity in a BTS30

TDU is installed on the top of the cabinet.

TEU is an optional unit used for SDH transmissions.

TES is the power supply unit of TEU.

FMU within the fan box controls the normal operation of fans and reports alarms
in case of fan failure.

PSU is the power supply unit for the whole system.

PMU is the power monitoring unit.

ABB is the Abis bypass board for the BTS30 in the chain networking.

ABA is the Abis bypass assistant board.

Switch box: distributed power supply is adopted to improve the reliability of


power supply.

Fan box: FMU is installed within the fan box.

Air box is the inlet for the cool air. It is part of the cooling system to guarantee
the normal operation of BTS.

Signaling Processor Unit


The signaling processor unit comprises Transceiver (TRX) unit, Power Booster Unit
(PBU), Combiner and Divider Unit (CDU), Enhanced Duplexer Unit (EDU) and Simple
Combiner Unit (SCU).
z

TRX is a software and hardware entity that performs all processing functions of
one carrier.

PBU is the output power booster of TRX. It also provides the function of alarm
collection.

CDU supports broadband hybrid combining. At the transmitting end, signals of 2


channels are combined into 1 (2-into-1), while at the receiving end signals from 2
channels are divided into 4 (or 8 in case of only one channel) channels.

EDU is a low-loss duplex divider unit which can achieve the transmitting and
diversity receiving of signals for two TRXs.

SCU fulfills 4-into-1 combining. It is used to save CDUs.

Antenna Feeder unit

1-5

User Manual
M900/M1800 Base Transceiver Station (BTS30)

System Description
Chapter 1 An Introduction to BTS30

Antenna feeder unit implements the receiving and transmitting of RF signals. It


includes the antenna, feeder, low-loss transmission cable and lightning arrester.

II. Software structure


BTS software not only performs the protocol functions specified in the signaling model
shown in Figure 1-3, but also implements BTS operation, maintenance and testing
functions.
Based on different hardware entities, BTS software consists of:
Radio interface signal processing unit, i.e., the Um interface media access layer
running in the digital signal processing unit of the TRX module,
Signaling processing unit, including radio resources management (RR), Abis
interface link layer protocol (LAPD), Abis interface media access control layer, Um
interface link layer protocol (LAPDm), etc. which run in the signaling processing unit
of TRX module,
Operation and maintenance unit, including BTS fault management, performance
management, configuration management, security management, data management,
Abis interface transmission control and local man-machine interface, which run in the
TMU unit.
BTS software also includes the programs handling the communication among various
units in BTS.
MS
BSC

CM
L3

BTS

MM

RR

RR

RR

BTSM

BTSM

L2

LAPDm

LAPDm

LAPDm

LAPDm

L1

SigL1

SigL1

SigL1

SigL1

BSSMAP

SCCP

CM: Connection Management


MM: Mobility Management
RR: Radio Resource Management
BTSM: BTS Management
BSSAP: Base Station Subsystem Application Part

Figure 1-3 BTS signaling structure

III. Cabinet structure


1)

Dimension

1-6

MTP

LAPD: Link Access Protocol on D channel


LAPDm: Link Access Protocol on Dm channel
SCCP: Signaling Connection Control Part
MTP: Message Transfer Part

User Manual
M900/M1800 Base Transceiver Station (BTS30)

System Description
Chapter 1 An Introduction to BTS30

The cabinet of the M900/M1800 BTS30 is a 19 inch standard cabinet in accordance


with the IEC297 standard, with the following dimensions:
HeightWidthDepth=1600mm 600mm450mm.
The cabinet is shown in Figure 1-4.
(4)

(8)

(6)
(2)

(7)
(1)

(5)

(3)

(1) TRX/CDU frame


(4) Switch box
(7) Front door

(2) Rack
(5) Fan box
(8) Back plate

(3) Common resource frame


(6) Air box

Figure 1-4 General view of the cabinet


2)

Cabinet features

Standard 19" cabinet.

Strong and simple structure.

Aluminum alloys are used to reduce the cabinet's weight.

Good shielding effect and conductivity.

Wind tunnels ensure good ventilation and heat dissipation.

Simple and convenient installation and maintenance.

1.5 Main Functions


Basic functions provided by BTS30 software and hardware are listed below.

1-7

User Manual
M900/M1800 Base Transceiver Station (BTS30)

System Description
Chapter 1 An Introduction to BTS30

1.5.1 Basic Software Relative Functions


The BTS30 has the following main functions:
z

Support both 900MHz and 1800MHz frequency systems.

Support EGSM/RGSM extended frequency band services.

All data services prescribed in Phase II+.

Support GPRS.

Support Phase I/Phase II /Phase II+ compatible LAPDm protocol.

Support Phase I/Phase II/Phase II+ compatible system message issuing and
resources instruction.

Support CS-1/CS-2/CS-3/CS-4 radio channel coding scheme.

Support FR (Full Rate) / EFR (Enhanced Full Rate) / HR (Half Rate) and all
kinds of speech coding scheme.

Support broadcast short message and point-to-point short message.

Support paging queue.

Support A5/1, A5/2 encryption/decryption.

Support basic data dynamic configuration.

Support basic data dynamic configuration.

Support measurement report preprocessing.

Support Abis,10:1, 12:1 and 15:1signaling multiplexing.

Support BCCH carrier cooperation.

Support immediate assignment combination and paging combination, boosting


the radio channel efficiency.

Support discontinuous transmission (DTX) and DRX.

Support omni cell and directional cell.

Support chain/tree/start/loop networking.

Support locked, fast pull-in, holdover and free run clock modes.

Support synchronous, asynchronous and quasi-synchronous handover.

Support Um interface tracing and internal interface tracing.

Support remote and local loading of software.

Support dynamic and static power control.

Support satellite transmission and Abis 16k signaling transmission.

Support extended cell.

Support scanning uplink frequency band.

Support Huaweis G-II power control algorithm.

Support multi-cell (up to 12 cells) configuration.

Support timeslot based baseband/RF frequency hopping.

Support Class3 MS large power.

1.5.2 Basic Hardware Relative Functions


z

Support eight E1s and 12 antenna feeders.

Support built-in optical transmission boards TEU and TES.


1-8

User Manual
M900/M1800 Base Transceiver Station (BTS30)

Chapter 1

System Description
An Introduction to BTS30

Support 24 switching/digital inputs, 8 digital outputs and 8 analog inputs.

Support cabinet combination.

Support storage battery management.

Support both M900 and M1800 modules.

Support lightning protection at trunk ports, power supply ports and RF ports.

Support E1 bypass after BTS power failure

Support PBU (Power Boost Unit) and EDU (Enhanced Duplexer Unit).

Support monitoring external power. The power monitoring module reports the
alarm when there is no power input.

Support the report of BTS bar code, software version and hardware version of
part of the boards

Support TMU self-correcting crystal oscillation central frequency.

Support clock backup and master/slave clock handover.

Support clock pull-in mode.

Support E1/RF self-loop test.

1.6 Technical Indices


z

Physical dimensions

HeightWidthDepth=1600mm600mm450mm
z

Power system

220V AC: 150~280VAC/45~65Hz


-48V DC: -40~-60VDC
24V DC: 19~29VDC
z

Working temperature

-5C ~ +45C (ambient temperature)


z

Working humidity

15% ~ 85%
z

Weight

180kg for a single cabinet when fully configured


2

Weight bearing requirement: 250kg/m (with 10% tolerance)


z

Power consumption

Maximum power consumption of a single cabinet: 1200W


z

Receiving sensitivity

-110dBm (GSM900), -109dBm (GSM1800)


z

Transmitting power

TRX output power: 40W (46 dBm) or 60W (47.8 dBm)

1-9

User Manual
M900/M1800 Base Transceiver Station (BTS30)

System Description
Chapter 1 An Introduction to BTS30

TRX (40W) + PBU output power: 80W (49 dBm)

1-10

User Manual
M900/M1800 Base Transceiver Station (BTS30)

System Description
Chapter 2 Hardware Architecture

Chapter 2 Hardware Architecture


2.1 Overview
A BTS30 cabinet mainly comprises a common resource frame, a TRX frame and a
CDU frame, which can be flexibly configured according to the user demands. There
are also some other elements like TDU, switch box, fan box, air box, etc.
The hardware architecture of the BTS30 cabinet is shown in Figure 2-1.
TDU
SWITCH BOX

CDU

CDU

CDU

TX

TX

TX

TX

TX

TX

RX

RX

RX

RX

RX

RX

TRX TRX TRX TRX TRX TRX


FAN BOX

P P

TT TT

S M

MM E E

U U

UUSU

AIR BOX

CDU: Combiner and Divider Unit


PMU: Power Monitoring Unit
PSU: Power Supply Unit
TEU: Transmission Extension Unit

TRX: Transceiver Unit


TMU: Timing/Transmission and Management Unit
TES: Transmission Extension Power Supply Unit
TDU: Timing Distribution Unit

Figure 2-1 Hardware architecture of the BTS30 cabinet


2-1

User Manual
M900/M1800 Base Transceiver Station (BTS30)

System Description
Chapter 2 Hardware Architecture

2.2 CDU Frame


The CDU frame implements the combining of transmitted signals, dividing of received
signals and duplex functions. The frame can be configured with CDU, EDU or SCU.

2.2.1 CDU
I. General
CDU combines and filters the transmitted signals, filters, amplifies and distributes
received signals. It also provides feed circuit for the tower-top amplifier through a
bias-T circuit.
Through bridge combing (broadband combing) used in BTS30, multiple TX and RX
signals can be multiplexed on a single antenna unit.
The 2 channels of transmitting signals are combined into 1 (2-into-1), while at the
receiving end signals from 1 of the 2 channels are divided into 4 (or 8 incase of only
one channel) channels.
Each CDU provides a diversity receiving branch.

II. Structure and function


The functional blocks of the CDU are shown in Figure 2-2.

Tx signal input

CDU

Combiner

Duplexer

Divider

LNA

Divider

LNA

Test coupler

Amp. feeder

Rx signal output

Alarm and control unit

Rx signal output

Rx filter

Amp. feeder

Figure 2-2 Functional blocks of the CDU


Besides the combining and dividing functions, CDU also has the following alarm
detection functions:
z

VSWR (Voltage Standing Wave Ratio) monitoring: Monitoring the status of


antenna system. When the detected VSWR exceeds the threshold 1.5:1, the
CDU reports minor alarm and the corresponding indicator on the panel is on.
When the VSWR exceeds the threshold 2.5:1, the CDU reports critical alarm, the
2-2

User Manual
M900/M1800 Base Transceiver Station (BTS30)

System Description
Chapter 2 Hardware Architecture

corresponding indicator on the panel is on, and signal transmission will stop 1
minute later.
z

Low noise amplifier fault alarm: The fault signal is extracted from the power
supply current of the low noise amplifier. When the current exceeds a certain
level, alarm signals and indications are generated.

Tower-top amplifier alarm: When there is tower-top amplifier in service, the CDU
determines the operation status of the amplifier according to its working current.
If the current exceeds preset value or there is no current, alarm signal will be
generated.

Control functions: Remotely control the low noise amplifier attenuation (dynamic
control 15 levels, in steps of 1dB) both in the main receiving path and diversity
receiving path, supply/cut the feeder depends on whether tower-top amplifier is
equipped, cut the feeder to the amplifier in case of alarm.

Note:
The input power of the CDU configured in BTS30 is 60W. When PBU is used, ECDU with large power
should be configured.

2.2.2 EDU
I. General
EDU is a low-loss duplex and dividing unit aimed to solve the issue of wide coverage.
It can perform the duplex function for two TRXs, the filtering of transmitted/received
signals, low noise amplification, and dividing function. It also provides feeder to the
tower-top amplifier.
Each TRX uses its own antenna, so no combination of signals is needed. For
received signals, 1-to-2 dividing is employed.

II. Structure and function


The functional blocks of the EDU are shown in Figure 2-3.

2-3

User Manual
M900/M1800 Base Transceiver Station (BTS30)

System Description
Chapter 2 Hardware Architecture

EDU
Duplexer

Tx signal input

Test coupler

Amp. feeder

Rx signal output

Divider

LNA

Divider

LNA

Alarm and control unit


Rx signal output

Tx signal input

Duplexer

Test coupler

Amp. feeder

Figure 2-3 Functional blocks of the EDU


Besides the combining and dividing functions, the EDU also provides the following
alarm detection functions:
1) VSWR (Voltage Standing Wave Ratio) monitoring: Monitoring the status of the
antenna system. When the VSWR exceeds the threshold 2.5:1, the EDU reports
alarm.
2) Low noise amplifier fault alarm: The status of the LNA can be determined based on
the power supply current. When the current exceeds a certain level, alarm signals
and indications are generated.
3) Tower-top amplifier alarm: When there is tower-top amplifier in service, EDU
determines the operation status of the amplifier according to the working current of
amplifier. If the current exceeds preset value or there is no current, alarm signal will
be generated.
4) Control functions: Remotely control the low noise amplifier attenuation (dynamic
control 15 levels, in steps of 1dB) both in the main receiving path and diversity
receiving path, supply/cut feeder depends on whether tower-top amplifier is equipped,
cut the feeder to the amplifier in case of alarm.

2.2.3 ECDU
The functions and external interfaces (including dimensions) of ECDU are the same
as that of CDU. It implements combination of transmitted signals, dividing of received
signals, and duplex functions. The difference is that the maximum power input of
ECDU reaches 100W.

2-4

User Manual
M900/M1800 Base Transceiver Station (BTS30)

System Description
Chapter 2 Hardware Architecture

2.2.4 SCU
I. General
SCU combines the signals from 4 TRXs into 1 channel for transmission. It employs
the electric bridge with 3dB power loss to achieve the broadband combing. Used
together with CDU, it can achieve the combination of signals from multiple TRXs. The
introduction of SCU is to reduce the number of CDUs, hence saving costs.

II. Structure and function


The functional blocks of the SCU are shown in Figure 2-4.

Tx signal input SCU


1
2

Combiner
Combiner

3
4

Tx signal output

Combiner

Figure 2-4 Functional blocks of the SCU

2.3 TRX Frame


The TRX frame implements all the processing functions of the carrier, including
baseband processing, RF processing, power amplifier and power supply. The TRX
frame can be configured with the TRX and the PBU.

2.3.1 TRX
I. General
TRX is the key part of the BTS which receives various types of management and
configuration information issued by the TMU and reports its status and alarm
information to the TMU.
The TRX separates the received information from the mobile stations through
demodulation and balancing into signaling and speech information, and transmits
them upward (i.e. to BSC and MSC). The downlink signaling and speech information
is sent to the CDU and the antenna after being processed by the TRX.

2-5

User Manual
M900/M1800 Base Transceiver Station (BTS30)

System Description
Chapter 2 Hardware Architecture

With a modular structure, the TRX module contains both the baseband processing
unit, and the radio frequency unit.

II. Structure and functions


The structure of the TRX unit is shown in Figure 2-5. It includes the baseband signal
processing unit (TBU) and the radio frequency signal processing unit (RPU).
DBUS

FH _BUS

CBUS

TDP
SCP

DSP

PAU

Send

RCU

Main receiver
Diversity receiver

CUI

TIMING_BUS
Clock processing part
TBU

RPU

SCP: Signaling Processing Unit


CUI: Carrier Unit Interface
RCU: Receiving Unit
TBPU: TRX Baseband signal Processing Unit
CBUS: Control Bus
DBUS: Data Bus

DSP: Digital Signal Processing Unit


PAU: Power Amplifier Unit
TDP: Transmitter Driver and PLL unit
RPU: RF signal Processing Unit
FH_BUS: Frequency Hopping Bus

Figure 2-5 Structure of the TRX unit

1)

Baseband signal processing unit (TBU)

The TBU consists mainly of the Signaling Processing Unit (SCP), the Digital Signal
Processing unit (DSP), and the Carrier Unit Interface (CUI). As the GSM system is a
time division multiplexing system, the operation of the TRX relies on various clocks.
So the TRX contains some clock processing logical units.
Signaling processing unit (SCP)

The SCP processes signaling protocols on different BTS interfaces, including the
layer 2 protocol LAPDm with the mobile station (MS), the layer 2 protocol LAPD with
the BSC interface, and the layer 2 protocol (DCL) with the operation & maintenance
module (OMU), as well as layer 3 non-transparent messages.
The SCP also handles DSP program loading and alarm processing of the whole TRX
module.
Digital signal processing unit (DSP)
2-6

User Manual
M900/M1800 Base Transceiver Station (BTS30)

System Description
Chapter 2 Hardware Architecture

The DSP performs such functions as signal encoding/decoding, signal demodulation,


interleaving and de-interleaving, and speech/data communication with the TRAU.
It sends the signaling received from the MS to the SCP, receives signaling sent from
the SCP, and performs corresponding encoding/decoding according to related
protocols. It sends the downlink data via the CUI to the carrier unit RPU.
Carrier unit interface (CUI)

The CUI is the interface between the DSP and the RPU. It supports baseband
hopping, and according to system configuration can work in either hopping or
non-hopping mode (when the system works in the RF hopping mode, the hopping
interface works in non-hopping mode and the hopping functions are completed by the
carrier unit).
The CUI samples and filters the uplink intermediate frequency signals sent from the
RPU, and sends them to the DSP for demodulation and combination.
Clock processing part

The TRX extracts clocks sent from the TMU over the clock buses. To ensure the
reliability, the clock buses work in active/standby mode. These clocks include the
frame clock, the octet bit clock, and the frame number.
The clock processing part in the TRX first chooses either the active clock or the
standby clock, then makes frequency division calculation and generates the timeslot
number and bit clocks required by the local TRX.
2)

Radio frequency signal processing unit (RPU)

The RPU consists of 3 parts: Receiving Unit (RCU), Transmitter Driver and PLL unit
(TDP), and Power Amplification Unit (PAU).
Receiving unit (RCU)

The RCU provides diversity reception functions, that is, the receiver consists of two
completely independent channels, and the input signals come from the main antenna
and diversity antenna. In complicated radio transmission areas where one antenna
receives very poor signal, the signal received from the other (diversity) antenna may
be of a better quality.
The BTS receives signals from both the main channel and the diversity channel, then
handles demodulation after combination algorithms. It can provide 3~5dB diversity
gain, thus improving the communication quality.
Each receiving channel consists of down conversion circuits. The received signals are
sent to the frequency mixer after filtering and amplification, so as to generate
intermediate frequency signals, which after further filtering and amplification are
directly sent to the baseband unit for digital demodulation processing.

2-7

User Manual
M900/M1800 Base Transceiver Station (BTS30)

System Description
Chapter 2 Hardware Architecture

Transmitter Driver and PLL unit (TDP)

This unit consists of 3 parts, transmitter excitation, frequency synthesizer, and PLL
testing.
Transmitter excitation unit directly modulates the I and Q signals sent from the
baseband unit through the orthogonal modulator into the radio signals for
transmission. This works rather simple and reliable.
After modulation, the signal controlled by the APC provides the power amplifier unit
(PAU) with a certain power level.
The transmitter excitation unit also provides the dynamic and static power control at
the base station. Static power control (the maximum transmission power of the base
station) is specified during network planning. In contrast, dynamic power control is
performed during communication. Static power control has 0~10 levels (level 0 is
46dBm), decrementing by 2dBm each level. Dynamic power control has 0~15 levels,
decrementing by 2dBm each level.
To reduce noise in the radio environment and improves the network capacity and
service quality, the base station transmission power should be kept as low as possible
as long as the communication quality can be ensured. So each traffic channel is kept
at the lowest possible dynamic power level, with all idle channels transmission shut
down.
Moreover, transmitter excitation also provides the over-power alarm signal and
under-power alarm signal of the TRX. When the TRX output power is 3dB higher than
the specified level, over-power alarm will be generated. When the TRX output power
is 3dB lower than the specified level, under-power alarm will be generated.
Frequency synthesizer is the essential part of the whole transceiver. It generates
various local oscillation for the up/down frequency conversions, such as transmitter
local oscillation, receiver local oscillation, and PLL test local oscillation. Each of the
transmitter local oscillation and receiver local oscillation has two loops to achieve
hopping loop switchover.
PLL testing is designed for TRX loopback testing. It attenuates part of the signals
coupled by the power amplifier output into the receiving frequency band through
frequency conversion, then sends them to the receiver after coupling. It is used to
check the TRX transmit channel and the receive channel.
Power amplifier unit (PAU)

The PAU mainly performs radio signal amplification. Its maximum output power level
can be 46dBm or 47.8dBm. It also provides feed sampling signals controlled by the
transmitter APC, and the following alarm information:

2-8

User Manual
M900/M1800 Base Transceiver Station (BTS30)
z

System Description
Chapter 2 Hardware Architecture

Over-temperature alarm, when the temperature of the power amplifier exceeds


85C, the power amplifier unit reports the high-temperature alarm via the
baseband unit, and automatically turns off the power amplifier.

Over standing wave alarm, when the standing wave at the power amplifier output
end exceeds 3.5, it reports standing wave alarm to the baseband unit.

III. Interface
External interfaces of the TRX module includes:
CBUS2: the interface between the TRX and the TMU. The TMU performs

management and maintenance on the TRX module through the CBUS.


DBUS1, DBUS2: the switching functions of TMU switch the DBUS of the TRX to the

Abis interface. The uplink and downlink signaling processed by the SCP and the
uplink and downlink speech data processed by the DSP are all transmitted through
the DBUS.
TIMING_BUS: it receives the frame clock and 1/8-bit clock as well as frame number

of the TDU, and obtains the various clock signals required by the TBU board through
the clock unit interface.
FH_BUS: used to transmit hopping data between TRX modules when the BTS is in

the baseband hopping mode.


Radio interface: the TRX radio interface has 1 transmit terminal and 2 receive

terminals. The function of the 2 receive terminals is the main reception and diversity
reception. The TRX radio interfaces are connected to the CDU.
Panel display: on the panel, there are 4 LED indicators, from top to bottom they are

power supply indicator, SCP running indicator, DSP running indicator, and fault
indicator.

IV. Indices
Power supply: +26V DC.
Average power consumption: 150W approximately.

2.3.2 PBU
I. General
The Power Booster Unit (PBU) is a kind of TRX output power amplifier aimed to solve
the problem of wide coverage. It can enhance the Effective Radiation Power (ERP) of
the antenna and enlarge the coverage area of a BTS. The maximum output power of
the PBU reaches 491dBm.
2-9

User Manual
M900/M1800 Base Transceiver Station (BTS30)

System Description
Chapter 2 Hardware Architecture

The PBU comprises the power synthesizer module, the alarm management module
and the power supply module. It can amplify the output power of 1 TRX.

II. Structure and functions

TRX
power
output

Input coupling & delay filtering

Amp. & phase control


Power module

26V
26V

Power synthesize
and detect

The functional blocks of the PBU are shown in Figure 2-6.

8V

60W power amplify

Couple
Output

PBU
power
output

Power Synthesizer Module


Power amplify control

Alarm collection

26V
8V

Control signal generation

Alarm collect & output


Alarm Management Module

Alarm output

PBU
Figure 2-6 Functional blocks of PBU

The PBU couples the 40W power signals output from the TRX into main channel
signals and coupled channel signals. The main channel signals, after delay filtering,
enter the power synthesizer unit. The coupled channel signals are amplified into 60W
signals before being sent to the power synthesizer unit. To obtain final combined
signals, amplitude and phase control will be conducted on the 2 channels of input
signals.
The generation of control signals and the collecting/reporting of alarms are completed
by the alarm management module. While the coupling, controlling and synthesizing of
power signals are performed by the power synthesizer module.
1)

Power synthesizer module

Under the control of alarm management module, the power synthesizer module
amplifies TRX output signals, and at the same time provides power control and alarm
information, and alarm signals to the alarm management module, which detects
power amplification functionality and reports alarms.
2)

Alarm management module

The alarm management module receives from the power synthesizer module the
power control and alarm information, and alarm signals. It is responsible for the
detection of power amplification functionality and the control over amplitude and
phase. It also reports relevant alarms.

2-10

User Manual
M900/M1800 Base Transceiver Station (BTS30)

3)

System Description
Chapter 2 Hardware Architecture

Power supply module

The power supply module supplies power to the power synthesizer module and the
alarm management module.

2.4 Common Resource Frame


The common resource frame is the most import part of the cabinet. It includes 14
slots. Except for slots No.8 and No.9 which are reserved, other slots are respectively
configured (from left to right) with PSUs (6 slots), PMU, TMU, TES and TEU.
Configurations of the TES and the TEU are optional.

2.4.1 PSU
PSU is a built in power supply module.
Depending on the power supply mode, BTS30 uses the power supply module of
different models. When 220VAC is adopted, the BTS uses the power supply module
with 220VAC input and +26VDC output. When +48VDC is adopted, it uses the
module with +48VDC input and +26VDC output. When +24VDC is used, no power
supply module is needed.
One PCU can supply power to two TRXs in N+1 flow-equalization hot-standby mode.
The working current of the module is 25A.

Note:

For detailed descriptions, please refer to section 2.7 Power Supply System.

2.4.2 PMU
I. General
PMU (Power Monitoring Unit) is close to the power supply module, managing the
power supply of the module. There are two types of PMUs: PMU for the DC/DC
module and PMU for the AC/DC module. The main difference between these two is
the battery management function. To reduce work load, both the AC/DC module and
the DC/DC module share one monitoring board.

II. Functions
Following describes the AC/DC module monitoring board.
2-11

User Manual
M900/M1800 Base Transceiver Station (BTS30)

System Description
Chapter 2 Hardware Architecture

1)

Control

Switch on/off of the power module (remote control available), with an output
signal of 12V/10mA

Floating/equalizing charge of battery and current limit control

Connect/disconnect control of battery protection load, with a 230.5V output


low-voltage alarm, loading power-on/off condition

2)

Switch signals

AC mains on/off signal and high-/low-voltage signal (12V/10mA)

Four fault status parameters (12V/10mA) provided to the monitoring board by 4


AC/DC modules

Fan monitoring status parameters (normally, 12V/10mA)

Fuse on/off status parameters of external battery (-0.3V<normal voltage


difference <0.3V)

3)

Current and voltage analog signals

Battery group current (A)

Total load current (A)

Busbar voltage (V)

4)

Panel design

PMU normal running indicator RUN: A green indicator flashes once per 500ms when
the monitoring module runs normally, it remains off or on when the system monitoring
module does not work).
System fault alarm indicator ALM: 1 red indicator.
5)

Description of interface setting

The monitoring board provides one RS485 port to report monitoring information to
TMU.
The illustration of the monitoring by the PMU is shown in Figure 2-7.
AC power supply

AC/DC

AC/DC

Fuse

PMU

Battery

Figure 2-7 Illustration of the PMU monitoring


2-12

Load

Fan

...

AC/DC

User Manual
M900/M1800 Base Transceiver Station (BTS30)

System Description
Chapter 2 Hardware Architecture

2.4.3 TMU
I. General
TMU is located in the common frame of the BTS30. It is the timing, transmission and
management function entity of BTS30. It has the following main functions:
z

Provides channel multiplexing and flexible networking modes (including star-,


tree-, and chain- connections).

Provides Man-Machine Interfaces (MMI) and operation & maintenance links for
software loading, fault management, configuration management, performance
management and security management, etc.

Provides centralized BTS clock and its management, and clock hot standby
function.

Provides alarm signal input ports, and handles external alarm collection and
control.

Two TMUs can be configured in the basic cabinet, providing clock source in hot
standby mode and serving to increase the number of E1 interfaces (each TMU
provides 4 E1 interfaces). In combined cabinet configurations, TMU boards are
configured in the basic cabinet only.

II. Structure and working principle


The functional blocks of the TMU are shown in Figure 2-8.

Active TMU
External clock
Abis
BSC

Maintenance Terminal

MMI

RS485
Environment Monitors

EAC

DBUS

BIU

BIU

OMU

CBUS

MCK

MCK

TDU
BSC: Base Station Control
BIU: Base Station Interface Unit
EAC: External Alarm Collector
TBUS: Timing Bus
CBUS: Control Bus

Standby TMU

TBUS

TMU: Timing/Transmission and Management Unit


OMU: Operation and Maintenance Unit
MCK: Main Clock module
DBUS Data Bus
TDU: Timing Distribution Unit

Figure 2-8 Functional blocks of the TMU

2-13

User Manual
M900/M1800 Base Transceiver Station (BTS30)

1)

System Description
Chapter 2 Hardware Architecture

Base station interface unit (BIU)

The BIU handles conversion and reconversion between digital signals of the BTS
internal HWs and the HDB3 codes (on E1 lines). It switches timeslots on HW to
achieve flexible timeslot configuration, extracts superior clock signals, supports
external clock input, and outputs accurate clock signals through phase locking and
frequency division. It synchronizes internal bus data transmission, or generates
free-run clock signals when superior clocks are not available (due to E1 line or BSC
fault) to synchronize internal bus data transmission, and generates alarm and reports
them to OMU.
One BIU module can support a maximum of 4 E1 lines. The BIU modules on the two
TMU boards in one cabinet can be mutually extended, and the data on the 8 mutually
extended E1 lines can be freely switched. The E1 interfaces on the BIU module can
be respectively connected to the BSC or to the higher/lower level BTS to complete
star, tree, and chain connections.
2)

Operation and maintenance unit (OMU)

The OMU module is the core control and processing center of the TMU. Through the
OMU, performance parameters of various BIU and MCK units can be directly
configured.
The OMU receives fault alarms, handles fault management, and communicates via
internal control buses with the CPU of various units (TRX, CDU, PMU, TES, etc.) in
the BTS, so as to complete the operation and maintenance of the whole system.
It collectively loads and saves the software of various BTS units before loading
software for each unit according to demands. Moreover, it supports the Man-Machine
Interface (MMI) connecting to the PC.
The Flash memory of the OMU module can store two different versions of BTS
software. One is the software currently used by the BTS and the other one is the
previous BTS software. It can load either version according to the requirements to
each board.
When the software on the BTS needs to be upgraded, the new version can be loaded
from the BSC through OML and saved on the OMU to replace the old version.
Meanwhile, the OMU keeps the original software version of the BTS as a backup, in
case the loading should fail.
3)

Main clock module (MCK)

The MCK is configured with an OCXO (oven controlled crystal oscillator) compliant
with the stratum 3 A standard, and phase-locking and frequency-division circuits.
According to system configuration, the MCK can work in the free-run mode or
software phase-locked mode to output a reference clock SREF with a stability better

2-14

User Manual
M900/M1800 Base Transceiver Station (BTS30)

System Description
Chapter 2 Hardware Architecture

than 5x10-8. Moreover, it can provide the frame clock FCLK used by radio interfaces,
the octet bit clock OBCLK, and the frame number (FN).
The clock source of a synchronous cell is provided by the MCKs on the two TMU
boards in the basic cabinet of the basic cabinet group. The MCK modules on the two
boards work in hot standby mode. Switchover is made automatically in case of active
board failure, which will be reported to the OMU.
4)

External alarm collector (EAC)

The EAC collects the alarm signals from environment monitors, including 8 inputs of
digital signals for fire, smog, (high/low) temperature, humidity, water, BTS room door
control (open/closed), cabinet door control (open/closed), and air-conditioning alarms.
For expansion, the EAC also reserves 16 input channels for digital signals, 8 input
channels for analog signals and 8 output channels for digital signals. The collected
alarm signals are reported to the OMU.

III. Interfaces
Abis interface: One TMU provides 4 E1 interfaces. two TMU boards can provide up

to 8 E1 interfaces for connection with the BSC or other BTS (corresponding to


different configuration modes of the BTS).
Internal data bus DBUS: provides two 32-timeslot TDMA buses (i.e. DBUS1 and

DBUS2) and corresponding clock signals, connecting the TRXs of one cabinet group,
and transmitting traffic and signaling data of TRXs. When there are less than 10 TRXs
in one cabinet group, 2 buses can work in the active/standby mode.
Internal control bus CBUS: The communication between TMUs is implemented

through CBUS1, and that between TMU and TRX is implemented through CBUS2.
CBUS3 is responsible for the communication between TMU and low-rate control parts
like CDU, PMU and TES, and between TMU and external monitors. For details, refer
to Figure 2-8.
Internal clock bus TIMING_BUS: provides clocks (frame synchronization clock

FCLK, octet bit clock OBCLK) and frame No. (FN) required by radio interfaces for all
TRXs in the synchronous cell, and the highly accurate reference clock SREF for the
radio frequency processing unit.
Alarm input interface EAC: provides 24 digital signal inputs, 8 analog signal inputs

and 8 digital signal outputs. Among them, the 8 digital signal inputs are external
environment alarm inputs, while the remaining 16 digital signal inputs, 8 analog signal
inputs and 8 digital signal outputs are reserved for user extension.
Man machine interface: a standard asynchronous serial port or network port, it

completes the communication with PC, enabling the operation personnel to perform
various operations locally.

2-15

User Manual
M900/M1800 Base Transceiver Station (BTS30)

System Description
Chapter 2 Hardware Architecture

External synchronization clock interface: inputs highly accurate 2MHz clock

compliant with G.703 wave forms, which is used as the frequency reference of E1 and
system data buses.

IV. Indices
Board size: 280mm233mm.
Power supply: +26V DC.
Average power consumption: 15W.

2.4.4 TES
TES provides TEU with various types of working power supplies and handles
communication transfer. It provides +5V and -5V power and ringing current, so that
TEU board can work normally to perform transmission network functions, thus
realizing base station built-in transmission.
TES can communicate with TEU and TMU to achieve information reporting from TEU
to TMU.

I. Functions
The TES board has the main functions as follows:
z

Provides the transmission board with DC power supply, including +5V and -5V.

Achieves the communication between TMU and TEU.

Provides transmission board with ring current, the ringing current signal is the
75V/25Hz sine wave AC signals.

II. Structure
The structure of the TES unit is shown in Figure 2-9.

Power
supply
module

+26 V input

1st +5V output

To the 1st TEU

2nd +5V output

To the 2nd TEU

-5 V output
Ringing current output

To two TEUs simultaneously


To two TEUs simultaneously

To TMU communication serial port

Communication
module

To TEU communication serial port

Figure 2-9 TES structure

2-16

User Manual
M900/M1800 Base Transceiver Station (BTS30)

System Description
Chapter 2 Hardware Architecture

Power supply module

The power supply module of the TES board includes two parts, the DC/DC
conversion circuit and the DC/AC conversion circuit. The DC/DC conversion circuit
converts two +24V DC supplies into +5V DC and one +24V DC supply into 5V DC.
The DC/AC conversion circuit converts +24V DC into 75V AC ringing current.
The ringing current module is featured by high performance ringing current signal
sources, sine wave output, low distortion, light weight, and high power density. Its
output voltage is 75V AC, and its output current is 40mA, with a standard tone of
25Hz.

Note:

Figure 2-9 shows that TES can provide power for 2 TEU boards.

Communication module

The main function of the communication module is to handle the communication


between TES and TMU, between TES and TEU, and to acquire the PCB version No.
and cabinet No. of the TES board.
The serial port communication between TES and TMU is implemented through
RS485 standard. TES is connected with CBUS3 via the level conversion circuit. The
serial port communication between TES and TEU adopts the point-to-point mode,
with the serial port level as the TTL level.
Communication with TMU mainly includes reporting transmission network information
and transmission board information from TEU to TMU, as well as reporting TES board
status information to TMU.
Communication with TEU is mainly to acquire transmission network and base station
transmission board information.

III. Indices
The board's size is 280mm233mm, occupying one standard board position.

2.4.5 ASU board


Due to the complexity of network, the base station is required to support multiple
external interfaces and flexible networking modes.

2-17

User Manual
M900/M1800 Base Transceiver Station (BTS30)

System Description
Chapter 2 Hardware Architecture

Besides the E1 interfaces, the BTS30 also has the built-in transmission system. It
supports the 155M SDH optical interfaces. All these interfaces are provided by ASU.
The built-in transmission system makes product networking more flexible and saves
user's investment on transmission equipment.
ASU board is used in SDH transmission networks.
1)

Basic features

ASU uses Huawei-developed ASIC transmission chips, so the system has an high
performance/price ratio and stability. One board integrates all the functions of
standard SDH transmission equipment including double STM-1 optical interfaces, 8
E1 electrical interfaces, full cross capabilities, 3 necessary clock phase-lock working
modes, order wire, RS232 transparent transmission serial ports, and Ethernet
interfaces.
The ASU board provides 4 E1 interfaces with re-timing functions. When users want to
use this function (e.g., in the case when GSM and DDN have very high requirements
on clock precision), this can be set through network management.
Meanwhile, in application cases such as the GSM base station and private networks,
the user can be provided with 64kbit/s sub-rate cross functions between the first 4 E1
so that maximum utilization of transmission resources are achieved.
2)

Functions

The ASU SDH optical synchronous transmission system is standard STM-1


transmission equipment. Based on the existing sound technologies of Huawei
SBS155/622 products, it is fully compatible with the existing SBS155/622 products.
According to networking requirements, it can be configured as a Terminal Multiplexer
(TM), Add/Drop Multiplexer (ADM) or regenerator (REG). It can be used to form ring-,
chain-, and point-to-point network topological structures. It can also be combined with
Huawei SBS155/622H and SBS155/622B products to form complex networking
structures so as to enhance network performance and provide powerful services
protection functions (channel protection or multiplexing segment protection solutions
are optional). It is a cost-effective optical transmission device built in BTS.
The ASU has inherited merits of powerful network management capacity and
convenient operations from Huawei's standard transmission equipment. It uses the
same set of network management system as all the Huawei SBS series of SDH
optical transmission equipment. It can completely meet the OAM & P function
specified in ITU recommendations.
3)

Interfaces

ASU provides the following interfaces:


z

Line optical interfaces: 2 (interface type: SC/PC interface)

Electrical interface: 4~8 (E1/T1)

Order wire: 1
2-18

User Manual
M900/M1800 Base Transceiver Station (BTS30)

System Description
Chapter 2 Hardware Architecture

Ethernet interface: 1

User RS232 port (point to point): 1

Network management interface: Ethernet/RS232

2.4.6 ABB
I. General
In practice, chain networking is usually adopted in BSS networking. This networking
mode has the advantage of simple structure and low cost, but also it has the
disadvantage that when power failure occurs at a site, all services of the downstream
sites will be interrupted. ABB provides of Abis interface bypass function as a solution
to the problem above.

II. Functions
ABB is applied in the environment of BTS chain networking. It is in charge of the BTS
transmission trunk. When power failure occurs at a certain level (in the middle) of
BTS in the chain networking, ABB will bypass the Abis transmission line off this site,
and directly connect it to the downstream BTS. In this way, even if power failure
occurs at the middle level site in chain networking environment, the services of the
downstream site will not be affected. See Figure 2-10.

BSC

ABB

ABB

ABB

TMU

TMU

TMU

Site1

Site2

Site3

Figure 2-10 ABB working principle

ABB can also perform loop back at the transmission line, so that in the case of power
failure at the last level BTS, ABB will loop back the E1 signal for BSC to detect the
quality of the entire transmission link.

III. Location of Board


ABB shares the same slot with TEU, therefore the size of the board and the interface
definition is consistent with TEU. Since BTS30 has only one TEU slot, ABB is to take
the slot of TEU.

2-19

User Manual
M900/M1800 Base Transceiver Station (BTS30)

System Description
Chapter 2 Hardware Architecture

2.4.7 ABA
ABA realizes the communication between ABB and TMU. ABB communicates with
TMU via CBUS3. But the slot of ABB does not provide the connection with CBUS3.
Therefore, ABA is used to provide the connection between them. Via ABA, part of the
signals from ABB (e.g. the signals of ABA on position) can be transmitted to CBUS3
on the backplane of common resource frame.

2.5 Other Parts of the Cabinet


2.5.1 TDU
The TDU is at the top of BTS cabinet, serving as the control center of BTS clock
transfer. It receives the clock source (SREF, OBCLK, FCLK, FN) from TMU, and
forwards the clock source to the TRXs in this cabinet and the parts in other cabinets.
TDU can also transfer other signals (e.g. alarm signals).
The main functions of the TDU are:
Provides bus-control interface

1)

Clock Bus

In the simplex RS485 bus structure, it distributes the clocks generated by the active
TMU in the basic cabinet to various extension cabinets, The clock signal process is
shown in Figure 2-11.

A-bis

TMU

Boards in the main


cabinet

TDU

Boards in the
extension cabinet

Figure 2-11 BTS clock signal process

The TDU of each cabinet is connected to the bus. After receiving clock signals, it
transfers them to the TRX in the local cabinet.
The TDU of the last cabinet is connected to an adapter. All the TDUs form a
chrysanthemum ring of a clock bus. as shown in Figure 2-12.

2-20

User Manual
M900/M1800 Base Transceiver Station (BTS30)

C
D
U
T T
R R
X X

C
C
D
D
U
U
T T T T
R R R R
X X X X

C
D
U
T T
R R
X X

P P
S M
U U

System Description
Chapter 2 Hardware Architecture

C
C
D
D
U
U
T T T T
R R R R
X X X X

C
D
U
T T
R R
X X

P P T T
S M M M
U U U U

P P
S M
U U

Basic Cabinet

Extension Cabinet

C
C
D
D
U
U
T T T T
R R R R
X X X X

Extension Cabinet

Figure 2-12 Clock bus connection in a synchronous cell

Connection path:

Upper cabinet

TDU
JP3

Cable
transfer

TDU
JP1

Inner cable
distribution

TRB
JC2

Inner cable
distribution
(Connect with 6 TRXs)

Matching

Cable
transfer
Lower cabinet

Cable
Inner cable
TDU transfer TDU distribution
JP4
JP2

CMB
J24

Figure 2-13 Clock bus connection path

For the upper cabinet, JP3 should be configured with connector. For the lower cabinet,
JP4 should be configured with connector.
2)

Data Bus (DBUS)

DBUS is for the data connection between TMU and TRX. Each TMU provides 2 full
duplex DBUS link and TRX connection, called DBUS1 and DBUS2.
The physical feature of DBUS is differential RS485, TDMA synchronous bus and
distribution of 32 timeslots is similar to that of PCM.
The active TMU has DBUS connections to each TRX in the same cabinet. The active
and standby links are led from the main cabinet to the 18 TRXs in the local cabinet
group. There is no DBUS connection between cabinet groups.
For example, the signal connection between BTS30 cabinets is shown in Figure 2-14.

2-21

User Manual
M900/M1800 Base Transceiver Station (BTS30)

System Description
Chapter 2 Hardware Architecture

Figure 2-14 DBUS connection between BTS30 cabinets

The intra-cabinet signal connection is shown in Figure 2-15.

Upper cabinet

Lower cabinet

Cable
TDU transfer
JP6

TDU
JP5

Cable
TDU transfer TDU
JP8
JP7

Inner cable
distribution

Inner cable
distribution

CMB J25
(connect with TMU)

Inner cable
distribution

TRB
Inner cable
JC3
distribution
TRB (connect with 6 TRXs)
JC1

Figure 2-15 DBUS connection path

For the upper cabinet, JP6 should be configured with connector. For the lower cabinet,
JP8 should be configured with connector.
3)

Control Bus (CBUS)

CBUS1 is for the communication between the TMUs of this same site. It adopts
RS485 semi-duplex bus, asynchronous transmission. The link layer conforms to
HDLC protocol. The bus rate is 256 kbit/s.
Since only the PCM link in main cabinet group has the operation and maintenance
signaling of BTS. The master TMU in main cabinet group is to send the operation and
maintenance signaling to the slave TMUs in the two extension cabinet groups, as
shown in Figure 2-16.

2-22

User Manual
M900/M1800 Base Transceiver Station (BTS30)

System Description
Chapter 2 Hardware Architecture

Figure 2-16 CBUS1 connection between BTS30 cabinets

The connection of the intra-cabinet signal is shown in Figure 2-17.

Upper cabinet

Lower cabinet

Cable
TDU transfer
JP3
Cable
TDU transfer
JP4

Inner cable
TDU distribution
CMB J24
JP2
(connect with TMU)
Inner cable
TDU distribution
JP2

CMB
J24

Figure 2-17 CBUS1 connection path

CBUS2 is for the control link between TMU and TRX.


The physical feature is differential RS485 interface, semi-duplex bus. The link layer
conforms to HDLC protocol. The bus rate is 2 M. The 2 M clock of DBUS is used as
the clock of CBUS2. There is no CBUS2 connection between cabinet groups.
The connection relationship between CBUS2 cabinet groups and the connection path
are similar to that of DBUS.
CBUS3 is for the connection between TMU and some low rate control parts, such as
CDU, PMU and environmental monitoring instruments.
The physical feature is differential RS485 interface. The link layer conforms to DLC
protocol, differential transmission and master/slave communication. The bus rate is
9.6 kbit/s. There is no CBUS3 connection between cabinet groups.

2-23

User Manual
M900/M1800 Base Transceiver Station (BTS30)

System Description
Chapter 2 Hardware Architecture

Figure 2-18 Connection of CBUS3 between BTS30 cabinets

The connection of the intra-cabinet signal is shown in Figure 2-19.


Cable
transfer
Upper cabinet

TDU
JP6
Cable
transfer

Lower cabinet

TDU
JP8

TDU
JP18

Alarm box
Cable
transfer

Inner cable
Inner cable
TDU distribution CMB J25 distribution TRB
JP5 (connect with TMU and PMU)
JC3

Cable
transfer TDU
JP7

Inner cable
distribution

TRB
JC1

Cable
transfer

Inner cable
TRB distribution
CDU
JP1
Inner cable
TRB distribution
CDU
JP2
Inner cable
TRB distribution
CDU
JP3

Figure 2-19 CBUS3 connection path

For the upper cabinet, JP6 should be configured with connector. For the lower cabinet,
JP8 should be configured with connector.
4)

Frequency Hopping Bus (FHBUS)

FHBUS is used in baseband FH. FHBUS physically shares the same cable with
CBUS2, CBUS3 and DBUS. The difference is that FHBUS connects only to TRX.
FHBUS is an 8 bit parallel bus, semi-duplex, and conforms to RS-485 criteria. FHBUS
is for the connection between all TRXs in the same cabinet group (for BTS30, at most
18). There is no FHBUS connection between cabinet groups.

2-24

User Manual
M900/M1800 Base Transceiver Station (BTS30)

C
D
U
T T
R R
X X
P
S
U

C
C
D
D
U
U
T T T T
R R R R
X X X X
P
M
U

C
D
U
T T
R R
X X
P
S
U

Extension cabinet

System Description
Chapter 2 Hardware Architecture

C
D
U
T T
R R
X X
P T
MM
UU

C
D
U
T T
R R
X X
T
M
U

Main cabinet

C
D
U
T T
R R
X X
P
S
U

C
C
D
D
U
U
T T T T
R R R R
X X X X
P
M
U

Extension cabinet

Figure 2-20 FH bus connection between BTS30 cabinets

Connection path is shown in Figure 2-21.

Upper cabinet

Lowercabinet

Cable
TDU transfer
JP6

Inner cable
Inner cable
distribution
TDU
CMB distribution
JP5
J25

Cable
TDU transfer
JP8

Inner cable
TDU distribution TRB
JP7
JC1

Inner cable
TRB
distribution
JC3
(connect with 6 TRXs)

Figure 2-21 FH bus connection path

For the top level of cabinet, JP6 should be configured with connector. For the last
level of cabinet, JP8 should be configured with connector.
Transfers E1 signals in the local cabinet

TMU provides 4 sets of identical circuits E1 for lines. Plus the 4 E1 lines on the
standby TMU board, there are altogether 8 E1 signals that are transmitted on the
coaxial cable to each cabinet top where the TDU sends them via coaxial cable to
BSC.
Provides alarm channels

Inputs of 8 external and 16 extended digital alarm signals and 8 analog alarm signals,
as well as outputs of 8 digital control signals, are sent via the TDU to the TMU board
and the environment alarm box (for detailed description, refer to section 2.7.1 of this
chapter).
The input of the DC alarm signals of fuses and output of DC contactor control signals
are also sent via the TDU to the PMU of this cabinet.

2-25

User Manual
M900/M1800 Base Transceiver Station (BTS30)

System Description
Chapter 2 Hardware Architecture

2.5.2 FMU
FMU is in the fan box, used to control the fans.
The small size of the base station cabinet sets higher requirements for heat
dissipation. A perfect heat dissipation design should include air tunnels (mainly
related to structure), expected dissipation amount (mainly related to circuit working
temperature, environment temperature, system total power and efficiency), original
calculation of system heat (simulation makes better result if tools are available), fan
type, fan monitoring unit, and system heat design testing and verification, etc.
The functions and circuits of FMU are based on the fan type, specific fan control
requirements and control modes, as well as the specific system heat design.
It performs the following main functions:
Fan feeding

This part of circuit consists of power supply filtering and power supply voltage
dropping. It completes the processing works from system power supply to the working
power supply needed by fans, and provides feed to the fans.
Fan speed control

It controls the fan speed so that the fan can maintain a constant rotation speed,
meeting the system heat design requirements.
Alarm detection

Fan faults have 2 types, blocking and short-circuiting, both may stop fan running. The
FMU monitors the fan rotation speed, and determines the fan status (normal or faulty).
If fault is detected, alarm will be reported to the PMU.
Interfaces

The FMU provides the following ports: fan 24V power supply input port, fan box
power supply input port, and fan fault alarm terminal, which outputs low levels in case
of fan failure.

2.5.3 Switch Box


The +26V DC from the output busbar of the power supply backplane is inputted to the
switch box, and after passing the air switches for different power consumption units
and over-current protectors, it is outputted to the terminals on the backplane. These
terminals are connected to the power input terminals of different power consumption
units, thus achieving distributed power supply.

2-26

User Manual
M900/M1800 Base Transceiver Station (BTS30)

System Description
Chapter 2 Hardware Architecture

The distributed power supply ensures the normal power supply to other units when
the supply to one unit fails.
The power supply to CDU, EDU, TRX, TMU, PBU, etc., can be controlled through the
switches on the front panel of the switch box.

2.5.4 Fan Box


There are two kinds of fan boxes, one small fan box below the switch box, and two
large boxes below the second TRX/CDU frame. Both kinds of fan boxes are equipped
with FMU.
The fan box uses mixed-flow fans, which feature strong wind rate and pressure. The
FMU ensures the normal operation of fans, and reports alarms in case of failure.

2.5.5 Air Box


The air box is at the bottom of the cabinet, under the first TRX/CDU frame. It is the
channel for introducing the external cool air into the cabinet to ensure the normal
operation of the whole BTS system.

2.6 Antenna and Feeder System


The antenna and feeder system of the base station mainly consists of the antenna,
feeder, jumper, lightning arrester, tower-top amplifier (optional), etc. as shown in
Figure 2-22. Its main function is to transmit modulated signals and receive signals
from mobile stations.
Antenna and Feeder System

Tower-top
amplifier

Feeder

Cabinet

Lightning
arrester

Tx/Rx antenna

Tower-top
amplifier

Lightning
arrester

Diversity Rx antenna
Feeder

Figure 2-22 Composition of antenna system

2-27

User Manual
M900/M1800 Base Transceiver Station (BTS30)

System Description
Chapter 2 Hardware Architecture

2.6.1 Antenna
The antenna is the terminal of transmitting and the start of receiving. Antenna type,
gain, coverage pattern (including azimuth angle, pitch angle and declination angle),
and front/back ratio will affect system performance. A network planner sets these
parameters according to network requirements.

I. Antenna gain
Antenna gain indicates the antenna feature of electromagnetic radiation in specific
directions. Normally, the higher the gain, the stronger the field strength in the main
beam radiation direction (which means a larger coverage area), but nearby blind area
might occur.

II. Antenna pattern


The antenna pattern describes the radiating abilities of antennas in all directions.
(usually in terms of horizontal azimuth angle and declination angle).
Usually, there are two kinds of base station antennas: omni and directional antennas
according to the azimuth angle: Omni antenna radiates the waves in all directions i.e.
along 360 degrees, whereas directional antennas radiates along 120, 90, or 65
degree.
The declination angle of the antenna can be achieved through mechanical adjustment
or electric tuning. BTS directional antennas with declination angle of 0 or 2 are
available. Through adjustment by pitch adjuster, a wider angle can be achieved (e.g.
0~ 10).

III. Polarization
Polarization is used to describe the direction of electric field. Mobile communication
antennas include single polarization antennas and dual polarization antennas. For the
later antennas, two antenna's polarization directions are vertical to each other. So
using of dual polarization antennas can reduce the number of antennas needed.

IV. Diversity
Radio communication is much more complex than fixed line communication because
of electromagnetic waves propagation. In urban areas, the propagation of
electromagnetic wave has the following features:
z

The average value of field strength varies slowly with distance and time. Such
variation abides by the logarithmic normal distribution. This is called slow fading.

2-28

User Manual
M900/M1800 Base Transceiver Station (BTS30)
z

System Description
Chapter 2 Hardware Architecture

The instantaneous value of field strength presents a selective fading along


transmission paths due to multi-path transmission. Its fading pattern abides by
the Rayleigh distribution. This is called fast fading.

Either fast fading or slow fading will affect the quality of mobile communications, or
even lead to communication interruption. The diversity receiving technology is one of
the most effective ways to deal with fast fading. Two receiving signals from two
different antennas effectively decrease the fading effect.
Diversity includes polarization diversity and space diversity. In existing mobile
communication systems, either the space diversity or polarization diversity can be
used. Theoretical inferences show that in case of space diversity, when the distance
between two antennas is greater than 10 wavelengths, desirable diversity gain can be
obtained. Polarization diversity enjoys the advantage of convenient antenna
installation and space saving and is more widely used nowadays.

V. Antenna spacing
To reduce interference on the receivers, enough spacing should be reserved between
receiving and transmitting antennas. Spacing is determined by the out-band noise of
the transmitter and receiver sensitivity. In the GSM system, the antenna spacing
should be greater than 30dB.

2.6.2 Feeder
To reduce transmission loss, the base station uses low loss RF cables. There are
several types of main feeders available, including 7/8-inch and 5/4-inch. 1/2-inch
super-flexible jumpers are used between the antenna and the main feeder, between
the antenna and the tower-top amplifier, and between the cabinet and the lightning
arrester.

2.6.3 Lightning Arrester


The lightning arrester is used to prevent damage of lightning current to the antenna
and feeder system. Usually, there are two kinds of lightning arresters. The first type
applies the microwave principle to conduct the low frequency lightning current to the
ground so as to discharge the current. The second one is a discharging tube, when
the voltages at both ends of the discharging tube reach a certain value, the tube
conducts and discharges the large current. The second technique is used in the
BTS30.

2-29

User Manual
M900/M1800 Base Transceiver Station (BTS30)

System Description
Chapter 2 Hardware Architecture

2.6.4 Tower-top Amplifier (Optional)


To further improve the signal quality, Huawei BTS30 offers a complete solution by
providing the tower-top amplifier.
The tower top amplifier is optional. Normally it is installed close to the antennas,
consisting of triplex filter and low noise amplifier. The triplex filter is actually a device
composed of two duplex filters.
Signals from the antennas first pass through the triplex filter to filter out the out-band
interference, then the low noise amplifier amplifies the weak signals. Finally the
amplified signals are sent over the low loss cable to the BTS, as shown in Figure
2-23.
The purpose of the tower top amplifier is to enhance the receiving sensitivity of the
base station. So the tower-top amplifier is required to have a low noise coefficient.
The power of the signals received on the antenna varies greatly with the distance
between the MS and the base station. This requires that the tower- top amplifier have
a greater dynamic range.
Besides, the tower-top amplifier also has the by-pass function in case of DC power
failure.
The DC power supply of tower-top amplifier is fed through the center conductor of the
receiving feeder by the CDU. Since it is an outdoor device, a reliable waterproof
sealing is required.
The tower-top amplifier can operate under -40C~60C.
Triplex tower-top amplifier
Transmitting filter

BTS

By-path
Bias-T

Receiving
filter

Low noise
amplifier
DC

Figure 2-23 Structure of the triplex tower-top amplifier

2-30

Receiving
filter

User Manual
M900/M1800 Base Transceiver Station (BTS30)

System Description
Chapter 2 Hardware Architecture

2.7 Power Supply System


2.7.1 Overview
The BTS30 built-in power supply system provides +26V DC to the base station.
Together with power distribution, lightning arrester, and monitoring systems, they form
a complete power supply system.
To meet the power supply requirements of different users, two special AC/DC and
DC/DC power supply systems are provided, which are used respectively for the AC
power supply cabinet and the DC power supply cabinet.
The AC/DC power supply system has battery charging functions. The PSU power
supply unit described above consists of the AC/DC power supply module and the
DC/DC power supply module.
According to the general design requirements of the BTS30, multiple cabinets can be
configured at a site, which are interconnected via multiple sets of buses to achieve
flexible, convenient and reliable network configurations. So a proper power
distribution monitoring solution is required for the power supply system, e.g.,
centralized anti-lightning protection, and AC and DC power distribution. That is, each
cabinet should have its own power supply system.
The power supply monitoring board installed on each cabinet monitors its own power
supply module and part of environment parameters inside the cabinet, and reports
them to TMU via general monitoring bus.
The AC and DC inputs of the system has the following 3 modes, among them only
one can be selected:
220VAC: used for the AC power supply cabinet, with the AC/DC module and batteries

attached.
-48VDC: used for the DC power supply cabinet with the DC/DC module, no battery

attached.
+24VDC: used for the DC power supply cabinet, without AC/DC module or DC/DC

module, nor any battery.


The power supply input goes through the AC EMI filter or DC EMI filter to the wiring
terminals on the top of the cabinet, then to the backplane busbars in the common
frame. 220V AC and -48V DC are input to different sockets from the backplane
busbar, so as to avoid mistaken insertion.
No matter whether it is the 220V AC power distribution, -48V DC power distribution
solution, or the +24V power distribution, their outputs are all collected to the output

2-31

User Manual
M900/M1800 Base Transceiver Station (BTS30)

System Description
Chapter 2 Hardware Architecture

busbars of the power supply backplane. Then, the 26V DC is led out from the busbar,
along the cabinet wiring trough to the copper bar of the distribution box.
The 26V DC input from the battery is connected to the current diverter on the power
supply backplane, and then distributed through the distribution copper bar in the
distribution box to various power-consuming modules. They are respectively led out
from the distribution copper bar, passing the over-current protection devices set
separately for each power-consuming unit in the distribution box, and then connected
to the outlet terminals on the backplane of the distribution box. When the power to a
unit is cut due to over-current, other units will not be affected.
The illustration of the entire power supply system is as shown in Figure 2-24.

220V AC IN

EMI
filter

-48V DC IN

EMI
filter

Anti-lightning

Load

AC/DC

power

PMU

AC/DC
(DC/DC)
module

(DC/DC)
module

distribution

AC/DC
(DC/DC)
module

AC/DC
(DC/DC)
module

+24 VDC IN

EMI
filter

26V DC OUT

DC contactor

Battery group

Fuse

Figure 2-24 The BTS30 power supply system

2.7.2 Overall Structure


I. AC/DC power supply system
220V AC is led in after passing through the AC input anti-lightning power distribution
unit and the AC EMI filter on top of the cabinet. It then passes downward along the
cabinet wiring trough to the input busbar on the backplane of the power supply frame.

2-32

User Manual
M900/M1800 Base Transceiver Station (BTS30)

System Description
Chapter 2 Hardware Architecture

On this backplane, there are the 220V AC power supply busbar, -48V DC busbar, and
26V DC busbar. When the AC/DC power supply module is used, the -48V DC busbar
should not be connected to.
A fully configured cabinet uses the 4 AC/DC (26V/25A) modules (3 active + 1
standby), which can ensure a maximum output of 2600W.
The module size is 285mm233mm(6U)60.5mm(12E).
The structure of the AC/DC power supply system is shown in Figure 2-25 (For the
battery part, refer to Figure 2-24).
AC input anti-lightning power distribution unit A1441Z
220 V AC INPUT

Input busbar

PSU

PSU

PSU

PSU

PMU

Output busbar

26V DC OUTPUT
DC distribution copper bar

Figure 2-25 Structure of the AC/DC power supply system

II. DC/DC power supply system


The DC/DC power supply system uses a backplane the same as that for the AC/DC
system. -48V DC first passes through the DC EMI filter on top of the cabinet, then
downward along the cabinet wiring trough to the input busbar of the power supply
backplane.
On the backplane of the power supply frame, there are 220V AC, -48V DC and 26V
DC power supply busbars. When the DC/DC power supply module is used, the 220V
AC busbar should not be connected to.
In full configuration, 4 DC/DC 26V/25A modules (3+1 standby) are used to provide a
maximum output of 2680W.
The module size is the same as that of the AC/DC module, i.e., 285mm233mm (6U)
60.5mm (12E).
The structure of the DC/DC power supply system is shown in Figure 2-26.

2-33

User Manual
M900/M1800 Base Transceiver Station (BTS30)

Input busbar

System Description
Chapter 2 Hardware Architecture

-48 V DC INPUT

PSU

PSU

PSU

PSU

PMU

Output busbar

26 V DC OUTPUT
DC distribution copper bar

Figure 2-26 Structure of the DC/DC power supply system

2.8 Environment Monitoring System


It is not practical to monitor the BTS locally. Compared with the switch room, the
facilities in the BTS room are quite simple, and their operation environment can be
rather hostile. To ensure the normal operation of the base station equipment, and to
cope with various possible emergencies (e.g. fire, floods), a perfect environment
monitoring system is required.
The environment monitoring system consists of BTS alarm port and environment
monitoring instrument. BTS30 supports 14 switching/digital inputs, 8 digital outputs
and 8 analog inputs, collects external alarms and controls external equipment. EAC1
and EAC2 on the cabinet top are the physical ports for external extended alarm and
EAC alarm report.
The environment monitoring instrument is used to get the information on external
environment. It reports the alarm to BSC via TMU if the external environment
parameters meet the corresponding alarm terms. The external extended alarm is
switching (digital) signals, which is different from the EAC alarm.
The following gives the alarm functions provided by the environment monitoring
instrument.

2.8.1 Outlook of Environment Monitoring Instrument


The environment monitoring instrument consists of such sensors as host, humiture
probe, smoke probe, infrared probe, infrared tube, door status (position) switch etc.
Each probe connects to the host with cables.

2-34

User Manual
M900/M1800 Base Transceiver Station (BTS30)

System Description
Chapter 2 Hardware Architecture

Dimensions of the host:


Length (L) x Width (W) x High (H) = 390mmx270mmx55mm. The outlook of the
environment monitoring instrument is shown in Figure 2-27.

Figure 2-27 Outlook of Environment Monitoring instrument

2.8.2 Function Provided by Environment Monitoring Instrument


The environment monitoring instrument automatically monitors and generates
temperature, humidity, smog, and intruder alarms according to the set values.
Besides, it can start corresponding protection devices for fire-fighting moistening and
anti-burglary protection, etc. Moreover, it can receive commands from the control
center to modify parameters and start/stop protection devices.
The features of the environment monitoring instrument include:
z

Realtime display of temperature and humidity

Time display

Generating alarms including fire, smog, temperature, humidity, water and 3 kinds
of burglar alarms

A panel control keyboard

10 switch parameter inputs (opto-electrical isolation)

6 relays (maximum 5A/220V) to drive external executors

2 PWM (pulse width modulation) outputs (8-bit resolution, with a basic clock
500kHz)

Driving of 7 independent open-collector gates (absorbing current: 300mA)

Capable of communicating with TMU via the RS422 port

2.8.3 Environment Monitoring Instrument Inputs


z

Temperature: frequency-type temperature and humidity transducer

Humidity: frequency-type temperature and humidity transducer

2-35

User Manual
M900/M1800 Base Transceiver Station (BTS30)
z

System Description
Chapter 2 Hardware Architecture

Smog: Ion type smoke sensitive probe or opto-electrical type smoke sensitive
probe

Flame (optional): fire probe or high temperature difference sensitive probe

Anti-burglary detection: infrared detector, opto-electrical detector, and magnetic


sensor

Other sensor inputs: besides the quantitative temperature and humidity signal
parameters, the above sensor input signals can be extended into 10 switch
parameters

2.8.4 Alarm Indicators


Ten red indicators on the panel are provided, which correspond sequentially to the
following alarm parameters:
z

Fire alarm: fire alarm is determined by the high temperature and smog probe

Smog alarm: smog sensor timeout alarm

Temperature upper limit: an alarm is generated when the environment


temperature exceeds the set temperature limit

Temperature lower limit: an alarm is generated when the environment


temperature is lower than the set temperature limit

Abnormal humidity: an alarm is generated when the environment humidity goes


beyond the normal range between the upper and lower limits

Water: the alarm is generated when water is detected

Air-conditioning: an alarm is generated in case of failure of air-conditioning


equipment.

Opto-electrical: used for anti-burglary purpose, the alarm is generated when the
opto-electrical switch is triggered.

Infrared: used for anti-burglary purpose, the alarm is generated when the
infrared sensor detects outputs.

Access control: used for anti-burglary purpose, the alarm is generated when the
magnetic access control switch is triggered.

If there are multiple input signal channels for the same kind of sensor, alarm in any
channel will be regarded as the same kind of alarm, regardless of the specific
channel sending the alarm. Except temperature and humidity sensors, all other
sensors can be extended up to 10 channels at the most.

2.8.5 Executing Devices


The BTS30 environment monitoring function involves the following executing devices:
Six constant on/off relays (A~F) which function as the control and protection

devices, operating under 1A/220V. Their specific application can be determined by


the user. Their default settings are as follows:

2-36

User Manual
M900/M1800 Base Transceiver Station (BTS30)
z

System Description
Chapter 2 Hardware Architecture

Relay A starts the cooling devices, activated when the temperature exceeds the
set upper limit.

Relay B starts the heater, activated when the temperature drops lower than the
set lower limit.

Relay C starts the desiccator, activated when the humidity exceeds the set upper
limit.

Relay D starts the moistener, and is activated when the humidity is lower than
the set lower limit.

Relay E starts the fire-extinguisher, activated when the fire alarm is given.

Relay F starts the anti-burglary alarm, activated in case of burglary alarm.

Two pulse width modulation outputs (PWM) are driven by the open-collector gate,

with a driving current of 300mA, a period determined by the user, default value as 1
second, and a resolution of 8 bits (0~255).
Seven open-collector gate outputs, with a driving current of 300mA to control the

executors specified by the user.

2.8.6 Communication
There are two-way communication links between the environment monitoring
instrument and TMU. The environment monitoring instrument can report alarm and
data through this link to TMU. TMU can control the alarm box to start protection
devices and set alarm parameters by issuing commands.

2.9 Lightning Protection System


The BTS30 cabinets are connected with the power supply equipment through the
power cables and with the base station controller (BSC) via the trunk cables.
Lightning protection for the base station mainly includes lightning protection for the
power supply system and that for the trunk cables.
The BTS30 cabinet supports three types of power supply: 220V AC, -48V DC and
24V DC. As lightning protection for -48V supply system is the same as that for 24V
supply system, except for parameters setting. Only the lightning protection for AC
power supply and that for -48V power distribution are described here.
75: coaxial cable (E1), 120: twisted-pair cable (E1) and optical fiber (SDH) can be
used as the trunk cable for BTS30. For optical fiber the fiber pigtail is used for the
connection with the base station, therefore, its lightning protection is not covered
here.

2-37

User Manual
M900/M1800 Base Transceiver Station (BTS30)

System Description
Chapter 2 Hardware Architecture

2.9.1 Lightning Protection for DC Power Supply


I. Lightning current lead-in paths
DC power supply to telecom equipment is generally provided by the AC power supply.
The possibility for the DC power supply port being struck by lightning is very low. But
lightning current could be led into the DC power supply port in some ways, including:
z

In times of 48V power supply, the positive pole of DC power cable is grounded
at the power supply equipment and the communication equipment. If the
grounding point of the communication equipment is different from that of the
power supply equipment, a surge current could be caused from the positive pole
of DC power supply to the grounding point of the communication equipment due
to the transient potential difference between the two grounding points.

The effect of alternating magnetic field during lightning includes the following two
cases. First, the positive pole of DC power supply is grounded at both ends of
the power supply equipment and the communication equipment. If the grounding
of the power supply is connected with that of the communication equipment at
some point, induced current will be generated in the alternating magnetic field of
lightning through the close loop formed by the positive wire of DC power supply
and the grounding cable of the two equipment. Second, the alternating magnetic
field of lightning will generate an induced electric potential at both ends of the
negative wire of DC power supply.

If the DC power cables of several devices (including the devices with subscriber
lines, such as the switch) in the telecom equipment room are connected to the
same set of power terminals, the lightning current induced by the subscriber
lines can be transferred to the DC power supply of other equipment through the
power supply system, because the subscriber lines are powered by DC power
supply.

Surge current is led in through AC power cables and output to DC power cables
through the primary power supply.

Huawei provides a DC lightning arrester which is connected in serial to -48V power


supply to protect the equipment efficiently from lightning strike.

II. Principle of DC lightning arrester


The circuit of this module is designed based on massive experiments. It is a 3-level
protection circuit. The function of the inductor is to suppress current mutation so that
the voltage-sensitive resistor group can function normally.
At the first level, two voltage-sensitive resistors are connected in parallel to increase
the lightning current discharge capability. The protection circuit of the second level is
the same as that of the first level. The protection circuit of the third level clamps the
residual voltage at about 100V.
2-38

User Manual
M900/M1800 Base Transceiver Station (BTS30)

System Description
Chapter 2 Hardware Architecture

Its functional blocks are shown in Figure 2-28.

Inductor

-48V
Over-current
protection

Over-current
protection

-48V

Inductor

Over-current
protection

Over-current
protection

Output

Input
V-sensitive
resistor

V-sensitive
resistor

V-sensitive
resistor

TVS
component

GND

GND

Figure 2-28 Functional blocks

2.9.2 Lightning Protection for AC Power Supply


I. Lightning current lead-in paths
AC power supply suffers directly from lightning strike or induced lightning.

II. Principle of the AC lightning arrester


The principle of the AC lightning arrester is similar to that of the DC lightning arrester.
The functional blocks are shown in Figure 2-29.
Inductor
IN

OUT

Air switch

Slow-blow fuse
V-sensitive
component

V-sensitive resistor
Discharge tube

Figure 2-29 Functional blocks of the AC lightning arrester

The lightning protection system features:


z

Symmetric design, N and L wires can be connected freely without affecting the
performance.

2-39

User Manual
M900/M1800 Base Transceiver Station (BTS30)
z

System Description
Chapter 2 Hardware Architecture

2-level lightning protection guarantees high reliability and less possibility of


damage by lightning strikes.

2-level protection and 2-level alarm are provided (visible alarm. If either level
fails, corresponding indicator will be off. On/off signals of the dry contactor are
also provided). The circuits are designed in parallel so that the maintenance
personnel can repair them without power-off.

The total through-flow current is 40A. There are two output terminals so that two
cabinets can share one anti-lightning box.

2.9.3 Lightning Protection for Trunk Cables


There are three kinds of trunk cables in BTS30: 75: coaxial cable (E1), 120:
twisted-pair cable (E1) and optical fiber (SDH). In case of optical fiber connections,
fiber pigtail is used so that its lightning protection is not considered.
BTS30 E1 interface protection is realized by adding a E1 lightning protection board to
the top of the cabinet. Each board has eight pairs of E1 protection units and two

RX0

TX0

RX1

TX1

RX2

TX2

RX3

TX3

TX4

RX4

TX5

RX5

TX6

RX6

TX7

RX7

To Equipment

To Line

DB37 connectors. The E1 lightning protection board is illustrated in Figure 2-30.

LightningProof Box

Figure 2-30 E1 lightning protection board

All E1 cables are protected by the lightning protection board, which is able to avoid
the thunder current from entering the cabinet via E1 cable. Even the strong current
impact can be discharged by the discharging tube. The lightning protection board is
illustrated in Figure 2-31.

2-40

User Manual
M900/M1800 Base Transceiver Station (BTS30)

E1-Tip

System Description
Chapter 2 Hardware Architecture

4.7

E1-Tip

Discharging tube
E1-Ring

4.7

E1-Ring

Discharging tube
PE

PE

Figure 2-31 Circuit of lightning protection board

2-41

User Manual
M900/M1800 Base Transceiver Station (BTS30)

System Description
Chapter 3 Software Architecture

Chapter 3 Software Architecture


3.1 Overview
The BTS30 software is mainly composed of signaling processing program, baseband
signal processing program, operation & maintenance program, BTS testing program,
etc.
They implement the function of radio link layer protocols and Abis interface protocols,
manage radio channels in real time, and all internal connections/communication,
control the transmission equipment, execute operation & maintenance functions for
each part of the BTS, and provide Man-Machine Interface (MMI) for local
management.

I. Signaling processing program


Only through signaling can different entities in the network coordinate and information
be transferred. So between BTS and BSC, not only speech and data, but also
signaling for call control are transmitted.
The Signaling Control Processing (SCP) program is the control part of the TRX. It
transparently transmits layer 3 messages of the Um interface to the Abis interface,
and works with the BSC to perform radio resources management functions and part
of the layer 3 functions of the Um interface.
It completes the data link layer functions (LAPD) of the Abis interface and the data
link layer functions (LAPDm) of the Um interface.
The SCP is also responsible for the operation and maintenance functions of TRX.
The SCP program is the core of the BTS30 service processing. It implements most of
the service processing functions of The BTS30.
The SCP program runs in the transceiver baseband processing unit (TBPU) of the
TRX module.

II. Baseband signal processing program


The baseband signal processing program, together with the hardware circuit in the
digital signal processing unit of the TRX module, performs the physical layer functions
of the Um interface. Its major functions include the coding/decoding of speech, data
and signaling on radio channels, modulation of the transmitted signals and
demodulation of the received signals.
3-1

User Manual
M900/M1800 Base Transceiver Station (BTS30)

System Description
Chapter 3 Software Architecture

Signal transmission over radio channels features high bit error rate due to its
time-varying characteristics, interference of various random noises, multi-path fading,
and shadow effect.
To ensure high quality signal transmission, the signals carrying user and signaling
data shall be transformed into another form suitable for radio transmission at the
transmitting end, and converted back to the original form at the receiving end. Such
conversion

includes

interleaving/de-interleaving,

the

processes
burst

of

formatting,

channel

coding/decoding,

encryption/decryption

and

modulation/demodulation.
The baseband signal processing program is running on the TBPU board of TRX
module.

III. Operation & maintenance program


The operation and maintenance program is the common control part in the BTS30
software as well as the core of BTS operation and maintenance functions.
The functions of the operation and maintenance program include BS software loading,
BS initializing, BS operational status monitoring and management, alarm collection,
resources utilization and interface message tracing.
The BTS30 interface equipment (hardware) is integrated as a module in the TMU,
and the corresponding transmission equipment control system is also integrated into
the operation and maintenance software for controlling the transmission link between
BSC and BTS.
Through the control program of the transmission equipment, the transmission links
between BTS and BSC can be flexibly configured to support star, tree, chain and ring
topologies.
This control program also supports the remote loopback testing via the TMU.
Operation & maintenance program and the transmission equipment control program
run in the TMU board.

3.2 Signaling Control Processing (SCP) Program


The SCP program is the control part of the TRX unit and performs the following
functions:
Layer 3 signaling functions, including:
z

Radio resource management functions specified in GSM 08.58 and GSM 04.08.

Coordination with TMU board software to implement operation and maintenance


functions specified in GSM 12.21.

3-2

User Manual
M900/M1800 Base Transceiver Station (BTS30)

System Description
Chapter 3 Software Architecture

Data link layer functions, including:


z

Data link layer functions (LAPD, GSM 08.56) on the Abis interface.

Data link layer functions (LAPDm, GSM04.05, GSM 04.06) on the Um interface.

Data link layer functions on the internal interfaces with TMU.

Media control layer functions, including:


z

CBUS signaling channel control functions with TMU.

DBUS signaling channel communication functions with BSC.

Mailbox communication functions based on the HPI interface with DSP.

The layer 3 functions of the signaling processing program include 3 parts: radio
subsystem management, operation & maintenance interface management and LAPD
layer 2 entity management.
The radio subsystem management part includes:
Radio link management, including setup and release of radio links between BTS
and MS, and transmitting transparent messages between MS and NSS.
Dedicated channel management, i.e., dedicated channel activation/deactivation,
signaling and user data encryption/decryption, dynamic power control of BS and MS,
MS timing advance control, etc.
Common control channel management, such as random access detection,
dispatching, combining and sending of immediate-assignment messages and paging
messages, system message modification, etc.
TRX management, such as idle channel quality detection, reporting BTS overload
information and other kinds of faults.
The operation & maintenance interface part interfaces and works with the operation &
maintenance program to perform the following functions:
z

TRX software loading.

TRX initializing.

Alarm and status management.

Equipment self-testing.

Resources monitoring and signaling tracing.

The LAPD layer 2 management part manages data link entities at the Abis interface
side.
The architecture of the signaling processing program is shown in Figure 3-1.

3-3

User Manual
M900/M1800 Base Transceiver Station (BTS30)

System Description
Chapter 3 Software Architecture

SCP layer 3 signaling

LAPD

HDLC

LAPDm

Data link layer

DBUS

CBUS

Mailbox

Media control layer

BSC

TMU

CHDSP

SCP: Signaling Control Processing


HDLC: High-level Data Link Control
BSC: Base Station Controller
DBUS: Data BUS
CHDSP: Channel Digital Signal Processing

LAPD: Link Access Protocol on the D channel


LAPDm: Link Access Protocol on the Dm channel
TMU: Timing/Transmission and Management Unit
CBUS: Control BUS

Figure 3-1 The architecture of the signaling processing program

3.3 Baseband Signal Processing Program


The functions of the baseband digital signal processing program include:
z

Digital demodulation functions.

Encoding and decoding, interleaving and de-interleaving of speech, data, and


signaling on the radio channel.

Encryption and decryption of speech, data, and signaling on the radio channel.

In-band control and transmission functions of speech and data.

Rate adaptation of speech and data between the radio channel encoding module
and the transcoder.

Provisioning of the internal signaling with L3 module and the primitive


communication with the LAPDm module.

Communication with operation and maintenance.

The architecture of the baseband signal processing program is shown in Figure 3-2.

3-4

User Manual
M900/M1800 Base Transceiver Station (BTS30)

System Description
Chapter 3 Software Architecture

Baseband signal processing program layer

Deinterleaving module

Burst formatting module

Burst formatting module

Cyphering module

Decyphering module

...

Embedded realtime operating system

Interleaving module

Rate adapter unit

Channel dec. module

Subchannel n processing

Subchannel 1 processing

Channel coding module

Radio channel allocation module

Logical subchannel message and


primitive processing module

Common module

Message and primitive processing common module

O&M
module

I/O module

BIU

SCP

CUI

BIU: Base station Interface Unit


CUI: Carrier Unit Interface controller

SCP: Signaling Control Program


I/O: Input/Output

Figure 3-2 Architecture of the baseband signal processing program


As shown in the figure, in downlink direction, signaling and speech are first
channel-encoded and interleaved, then the bits whose sequences are associated are
de-associated and formatted into bursts, after encryption and modulation, they are
sent to the carrier interface unit. The process is reversed in the uplink direction.

3.4 Operation and Maintenance Program


The BTS30 operation and maintenance program allows users to operate and
maintain the BSS remotely through the OMC Shell or locally through MMI.

I. Hardware architecture
The BTS30 operation and maintenance program runs on the TMU board. The TMU is
connected with BSC and local maintenance terminals in the uplink direction, and
connected with various boards of the BTS in the downlink direction. The active and

3-5

User Manual
M900/M1800 Base Transceiver Station (BTS30)

System Description
Chapter 3 Software Architecture

standby TMUs monitor the operation/maintenance and management on all devices of


a BTS.
Hardware structure of operation and maintenance program is shown in Figure 3-3.
BSC
High speed DCL

MMI
Active TMU
TRX

Extended TMU

Standby TMU
CDU

CDU
CDU

TRX
High speed DCL

PMU

Standby TMU
TRX

CDU
PMU

CDU
CDU

TRX

PMU

High speed DCL


PMU

PMU

TRX

TRX
High speed DCL

PMU
Low speed DCL

Low speed DCL

Low speed DCL

BSC: Base Station Controller


TMU: Timing/ Transmission and Management Unit
PMU: Power Monitoring Unit
TBU: Transceiver Baseband Unit
LR DCL: Low-bit Rate Diagnostic Control Link

MMI: Man Machine Interface


CDU: Combiner & Divider Unit
TES: Transmission Extension power Supply Unit
HR DCL: High-bit Rate Diagnostic Control Link

Figure 3-3 Architecture of the operation and maintenance program

II. Functions
1)

Layer 3 signaling functions

Remote software loading for all parts of the BTS30 (including BTS itself), so
there is no need to replace the program firmware at site.

Monitoring and controlling the status of all channels and boards, as well as
blocking/unblocking of all channels.

Setting of the BTS operational parameters, such as BTS attributes, carrier


related attributes and channel related attributes, and controlling of the Abis
interface circuits.

BTS devices testing, including loopback testing of the BTS radio unit, testing of
boards, and locating faults if any fault is detected.

Interface tracing, especially on the Um interface along with other BTS internal
interfaces.

Alarm monitoring, detection of BTS internal alarms, such as various board


alarms, and external environment alarms (e.g., temperature, humidity, fire, etc.).
Incase of any major alarm, the operation and maintenance unit can take
3-6

User Manual
M900/M1800 Base Transceiver Station (BTS30)

System Description
Chapter 3 Software Architecture

corresponding protection measures, such as cutting off the power supply for
power amplifier, to prevent further equipment damage to the equipment.
z

Operation and maintenance (network management) functions defined in TS


GSM 12.21.

Other operation and maintenance functions.

2)

Data link layer functions

Data link layer (LAPD, GSM 08.56) on the Abis interface

High speed DCL data link layer (HDLC based 1-N, active/standby, bidirectional
acknowledged communication protocol).

Low speed DCL data link layer (1-N, active/standby, bidirectional acknowledged
communication protocol).

Local maintenance terminal serial port data link layer (point to point,
active/standby, bidirectional acknowledged communication protocol).

3)

I/O functions

Abis link, I/O functions of PCM specified timeslot.

High speed DCL, I/O functions based on HDLC.

Low speed DCL, I/O functions based on UART.

UART-based I/O functions with local maintenance terminal.

III. Structure
The BTS30 operation and maintenance program comprises the L3 module, the
modules of various link layers, the communication port I/O module, the common
module and the transmission equipment control module, as shown in Figure 3-4.
L3

High speed DCL

I/O

I/O

A-bis

Ext. TMU link

I/O

Standby TMU, TBU Extended TMU

LAPD: Link Access Protocol on D channel


MMI: Man-Machine Interface
I/O: Input / Output
TBU: Transceiver Baseband Unit

Low speed DCL

MMI

I/O

I/O

CDU

MMI

Transmission equipment
control module

LAPD

BIU module

DCL: Diagnostic Control Link


BIU: BTS Interface Unit
TMU: Timing/Transmission and Management Unit
CDU: Combiner and Divider Unit

Figure 3-4 Structure of operation and maintenance program


The BTS30 operation and maintenance program has interface relationships with all
other program modules in the system.

3-7

User Manual
M900/M1800 Base Transceiver Station (BTS30)

System Description
Chapter 3 Software Architecture

The BTS30 operation and maintenance program is a multitask realtime program


designed

with

message-oriented

and

data

structure-oriented

method.

Its

object-oriented data structure is represented in the mapping relationship between the


tree-type logic structure of the site and the physical boards. Between the functional
modules, information is exchanged in form of messages, which reduces the coupling
and enhances the cohesion. This design method helps to enhance the system
reliability and expandability.
The transmission equipment control module
z

Performs sub-channel multiplexing and demultiplexing functions on the radio


channels, and timeslot switching at the Abis interface or the BS interface.

Monitors the TMU board BIU running status, including E1 line local
asynchronization and remote alarming, loop interruption alarming, BS interface
link status, etc., and displays (with TMU board indicator) the running status or
reports it via the operation and maintenance module when necessary.

3-8

User Manual
M900/M1800 Base Transceiver Station (BTS30)

System Description
Chapter 4 External Interfaces

Chapter 4 External Interfaces


The interface between BTS and BSC is called the Abis interface. It is fully compliant
with the GSM 08.5X and GSM12.21 series of specifications. At the Abis interface,
each terrestrial traffic channel corresponds to a radio channel.
The interface between MS and BTS is called the Um interface. It is an air interface
which guarantees the compatibility between the network and different MSs of different
venders. This is one of the basic conditions through which the GSM system
implements the global roaming.

4.1 Abis Interface


4.1.1 Introduction
The Abis interface is the interface between the two functional entities of the Base
Station Subsystem (BSS), i.e. Base Station Controller (BSC) and Base Transceiver
Station (BTS). It is an internal interface of the BSS that connects the remote BTS with
BSC through the terrestrial circuit. It is one of the most important interfaces in the
GSM system. If the distance between the BSC and BTS is less than 200 meters, the
two entities can be connected directly on the physical layer.

I. Features of the Abis interface


The Abis interface of the M900/M1800 digital cellular mobile base station system
supports all kinds of services stipulated in GSM standards. It also controls the BTS
radio equipment, and allocates the radio frequencies. It has the following salient
features:
z

Support all services defined in the GSM 02 series of specifications.

Support smooth expansion of BTS.

II. Description of the Abis interface


The Abis interface comprises a series of specifications, which includes:
z

Physical electrical parameters.

Channel structure.

Signaling transmission procedure.

Configuration and control procedure.

Maintenance and operation support

The hierarchical model of the Abis interface consists of three layers:


4-1

User Manual
M900/M1800 Base Transceiver Station (BTS30)
z

System Description
Chapter 4 External Interfaces

Layer 3: Transparent transmission of layer 3 messages from the A interface and


radio resource management function.

Layer 2: (data link layer) based on the LAPD protocol.

Layer 1: (the physical layer) 2048kbits PCM digital link.

The related protocols of the Abis interface are:

GSM 08.52 defines the basic principles for the Abis interface specifications, and
the function division between BSC and BTS.

GSM 08.54 defines the physical layer architecture of the Abis interface.

GSM 08.56 defines the data link layer protocols of the Abis interface.

GSM 08.58 defines the layer 3 procedures.

GSM 12.21 defines the transmission system of the OM message on the Abis
interface.

GSM 08.60 defines the in-band control protocol of the remote transcoders and
rate adapters.

III. Functional division between BSC and BTS


The BSS is composed of two functional entities, i.e. BSC and BTS.
BTS is the radio part of the BSS under the control of the BSC, providing services for a
specific cell. The BTS fulfills the interworking and mapping between the terrestrial
channels and the radio channels, as well as the interconnection between the MS and
the network via the radio interface (Um interface).
The BSC is the controlling part of the BSS, which manages both the external and the
internal interfaces, as well as the radio resource and radio interface parameters.
The specific function division between the BTS and the BSC is shown in Table 4-1.

4-2

User Manual
M900/M1800 Base Transceiver Station (BTS30)

System Description
Chapter 4 External Interfaces

Table 4-1 Division of services and functions between BTS and BSC
Location

Function
Terrestrial
channel
management

Radio channel
management

BTS

Channel allocation
Congestion indication
Channel allocation
BSC-BTS channel
Congestion indication
Channel configuration management
Management
Frequency hopping
Execution
Channel allocation
Link monitoring
DCH management
Channel release
Idle channel observation
Power control decision
System information
management
System information broadcast
BCCH/CCCH
Random access check
management
Immediate assignment

Channel code
Transcoding/rate
adaptation
Radio channel
management

Measurement

Timing advance

Handover

Note 1

Uplink measurement
Measurement report handling
Traffic measurement
Calculation
Indication to MS during random
access
Indication to MS during
handover
Indication to MS during
conversation

LAPDm function
Ciphering

Remarks

MSC-BSC channel

DTX paging management


DTX paging execution

BSC/MSC

Note 2

Management
Execution
Management
Handover access check

Mobility
management
Call control

Note:
1. The support of power control in BTS is optional
2. The initial measurement data is reported by BTS to BSC via the Abis interface. As an option, the BSC/BTS may
support preprocessing of the initial data in BTS, which reduces the load of BSC.

IV. Structure of the Abis interface


The Abis interface can support three different internal BTS configurations as
illustrated in Figure 4-1:

4-3

User Manual
M900/M1800 Base Transceiver Station (BTS30)

System Description
Chapter 4 External Interfaces

Single TRX.

Multiple TRXs are connected with the BSC via a common physical connection.

Multiple TRXs are connected with the BSC via different physical connections.

BSS
A-bis
TRX

BTS1

BCF
TRX
A

A-bis

MSC

TRX

BTS2

TRX

BSC

BCF

A-bis
TRX
TRX

BTS3

TRX
TRX

Figure 4-1 Different configurations of the BTS


TRX is the functional entity that supports 8 physical channels that belong to the same
TDMA frame, which is defined in the PLMN.
The BCF (Base Control Function) is the functional entity that performs common
control functions including BTS initialization, software loading, channel configuration,
operation and maintenance.
There are two types of channels at the Abis interface, which are:
Traffic channels with rates of 8kbit/s, 16kbit/s and 64kbit/s respectively, carrying
speech or data from radio traffic channels.
Signaling channels with rates of 16kbit/s, 32kbit/s or 64kbit/s respectively, carrying
signaling between BSC and MS, and between BSC and BTS.
Different Terminal Equipment Identifiers (TEIs) are assigned to get unique addresses
of TRXs and BCFs. For each TRX and BCF, 3 separate logical links are defined with
each TEI, as shown in Figure 4-2.

4-4

User Manual
M900/M1800 Base Transceiver Station (BTS30)

System Description
Chapter 4 External Interfaces

RSL: Radio Signaling Link, used to support traffic management procedures, one for
each TRX.
OML: Operation & Maintenance Link, used to support network management
procedures, one for each SITE or BCF.
L2ML: Layer 2 Management Link, is used to transfer the layer 2 management
messages, one for each TRX or BCF.
BSC

BTS
RS L
OML
L2ML

SAPI=0
SAPI=62
SAPI=63

TRX

TEI 1

BCF

Layer 2

TEI

Management

RS L
OML
L2ML

SAPI=0
SAPI=62
SAPI=63

RS L
OML
L2ML

SAPI=0
SAPI=62
SAPI=63

OML
L2ML

SAPI=62
SAPI=63

TRX

TEI 2

BCF

TRX
TEI 3
BCF
BCF

TEI 4

BCF

Figure 4-2 Abis interface layer 2 logical links


For Abis signaling, refer to Figure 4-3, which is explained in the following text.
BSC and BTS do not resolve CM (Connection Management) and MM (Mobility
Management) messages. These messages are transferred over the A interface by
DTAP (Direct Transfer Application Part). At the Abis interface, DTAP messages are
transferred as transparent messages.
RR (Radio Resource Management) messages are mapped onto the BSSAP (BSS
Application Part) in BSC. In BTS, most of RR messages are handled as transparent
messages. However, some of them have to be interpreted and executed by BTS (for
example, encryption, random access, paging and assignment), these messages are
processed by the BTSM (BTS Management) entities in the BSC and the BTS.
The layer 2 protocol of the Abis interface is based on the LAPD. The LAPD addresses
the TRX (or BCF) through TEI. Different logical links are used for traffic management
4-5

User Manual
M900/M1800 Base Transceiver Station (BTS30)

System Description
Chapter 4 External Interfaces

message (RSL, i.e., Radio signaling link), network management message (OML, i.e.,
Operation & Maintenance link), and L2 management messages (L2ML, i.e., Layer 2
Management link).
Layer 1 of the Abis interface is the physical layer hardware-based bottom driver,
responsible for receiving and sending data to the physical link.
BTS

MS

BSC

CC
MM

L3

RR

RR
RR

BTSM

BTSM

L2

LAPDm

LAPDm

LAPD

LAPD

L1

Sign.
Layer 1

Sign.
Layer 1

Sign.
Layer 1

Sign.
Layer 1

Um

BSSAP

SCCP
MTP

A-bis

CM: Connection Management


MM: Mobility Management
RR: Radio Resources Management
LAPD: Link Access Protocol on the D Channel
LAPDm: Link Access Protocol on the Dm Channel

BTSM: BTS Management


BSSAP: Base Station Subsystem Application Part
SCCP: Signaling Connection Control Part
MTP: Message Transfer Part

Figure 4-3 Abis interface signaling model

4.1.2 Physical Layer


The physical layer uses the 2048kbit/s PCM link, providing 32 channels of 64kbit/s.
The physical electric parameters of the physical layer comply with the CCITT G.703
recommendations.
The BSS is the connection point of the radio channel and terrestrial channel. Both
kinds of channels have different transmission patterns and coding rates. In the radio
channel of BSS, the transmission rate is 16kbit/s while it is 64kbit/s in the terrestrial
channel. Therefore transcoding and rate adaptation is needed. This function is
realized on the physical layer of the Abis interface by the Transcoder & Rate Adapter
Unit (TRAU) located at the BSC side or MSC side, depending on the networks
requirements. In this case, all speech, data and signaling should be transmitted at the
Abis interface at the rate of 16kbit/s or 64kbit/s according to the GSM 08.60

4-6

User Manual
M900/M1800 Base Transceiver Station (BTS30)

System Description
Chapter 4 External Interfaces

requirements. But before the transmission, rate adaptation and multiplexing is


required, according to ITU-T I.460 recommendation.
Data coding is described in GSM 08.20. The in-band control protocol of TRAU is
specified in GSM 08.60.

4.1.3 Data Link Layer


The data link layer of the Abis interface uses LAPD protocol. It utilizes the service on
the physical layer, and provides connection-oriented or connectionless services for
layer 3.
The data link Service Access Point (SAP) is the point that provides services for layer
3. SAP is identified by the Service Access Point Identifier (SAPI). A data link
connection endpoint is identified by a data link connection endpoint identifier as seen
from layer 3 and by a Data Link Connection Identifier (DLCI) as seen from the data
link layer.
The communication between data link layer entities is governed by a peer-to-peer
protocol specific to the layer. In order for information to be exchanged between two or
more layer 3 entities, an association must be established between the layer 3 entities
in the data link layer using a data link layer protocol.
Messages at the data link layer are transferred between entities at layer 2 of the
physical layer.
Data link layer Protocol-Data-Units (PDUs) are conveyed between data link layer
entities

by

means

of

physical

connection,

making

use

of

physical

Service-Data-Units (SDUs).
Layer 3 requests services from the data link layer via service primitives. The same
applies to the interaction between the data link layer and the physical layer.
The purpose of LAPD is to realize reliable end-to-end information transfer between
layer 3 entities through the user-network interface by using the D-channel. Multiple
terminals at the user-network interface and multiple layer 3 entities are supported by
LAPD.
Functions of LAPD includes:
z

Providing one or more data link connections on the D-channel.

Frame delimiting, alignment and transparency, allowing recognition of a


sequence of bits transmitted over a D-channel as a frame.

Sequence control, so as to maintain the sequential order of frames transmitting


over a data link connection.

Detection of transmission, format and operation errors on a data link connection.

4-7

User Manual
M900/M1800 Base Transceiver Station (BTS30)
z

System Description
Chapter 4 External Interfaces

Performing recovery operation based on the detected transmission, format, and


operation errors.

Notifying the management entity of unrecoverable errors.

Traffic control.

The data link layer provides the means for information transfer between multiple
combinations of data link connection points. The information may be transferred
through point-to-point data link connections or broadcast data link connections.

4.1.4 Layer 3 - Traffic Management


The traffic management part of the Abis interface layer 3 is mainly described in GSM
08.58 specifications. The procedures defined in this specifications has two major
functions:
z

Realizing the interworking of the MS and BSS/NSS on the Um interface.

Implementing part of the radio resource management functions under the control
of the BSC.

The traffic management message is divided into the transparent and non-transparent
messages.
The transparent message refers to the messages forwarded without interpretation or
being processed by the BTS.
The non-transparent message refers to the messages processed and constructed by
the BTS.
Other procedures inside BTS

Traffic management procedures


Allocation of channel
data links

Transparent
message

Non-transparent
message

Allocation
SAPI = 0

SAPI = 3

SAPI = 0
RSL

LAPDm

NM procedures
SAPI = 62
NML
LAPD

L2 management
procedures
SAPI = 63
L2ML

Layer 1

Layer 1

Figure 4-4 Abis interface layer 3 model


The traffic management messages can also be divided into four groups in terms of
functions, which are:

4-8

User Manual
M900/M1800 Base Transceiver Station (BTS30)
z

System Description
Chapter 4 External Interfaces

Radio link layer management message, used for the management of the data
link layer on the radio channel.

Dedicated channel management message, used for the management of


dedicated channels (SDCCH and TCH).

Common control channel management message, used for the management of


common control channels.

TRX management message, used for TRX management.

Transparency and group of the message is determined by the message identifier at


the head of the message.

I. Radio link layer management procedures


Link establishment indication procedure: Through this procedure the BTS
indicates to the BSC that a multiframe data link has been established at the initiative
of an MS. The BSC can use this indication to set up an SCCP connection to the MSC.
Link establishment request procedure: Through this procedure the BSC request
the setup of a multiframe data link on the radio channel.
Link release indication procedure: Through this procedure BTS indicates to BSC
that a radio link has been released at the initiative of an MS.
Link release request procedure: Through this procedure the BSC requests the BTS
to release a radio link.
Transfer procedure of a transparent L3-message in acknowledged mode:
Through this procedure the BSC requests the BTS to send a transparent Um
interface RIL3 message in acknowledged mode.
Receive procedure of a transparent L3-message in acknowledged mode:
Through this procedure the BTS indicates the BSC to receive a transparent Um
interface RIL3 message in acknowledged mode.
Transfer procedure of a transparent L3-message in unacknowledged mode:
Through this procedure the BSC requests the BTS to send a transparent Um
interface RIL3 message in unacknowledged mode.
Receive procedure of a transparent L3-message in unacknowledged mode:
Through this procedure the BTS indicates the BSC to receive a transparent Um
interface RIL3 message in unacknowledged mode.
Link error indication procedure: Through this procedure the BTS indicates the BSC
incase of any abnormality in the radio link layer.

4-9

User Manual
M900/M1800 Base Transceiver Station (BTS30)

System Description
Chapter 4 External Interfaces

II. Dedicated channel management procedures


Channel activation procedure: Through this procedure the BSC sends commands
to the BTS to activate a dedicated channel for a certain MS. After the activation, the
BSC assigns the channel to the MS using commands such as Immediate Assign,
Assign Command, Additional Assignment or handover commands.
Channel mode modify procedure: This procedure is used by the BSC to request
the BTS to change the mode of the activated channel.
Handover detection procedure: This procedure is used between the target BTS and
target BSC to detect the handover access of the MS.
Start ciphering procedure: Used for starting the ciphering procedure defined in TS
GSM 04.08.
Measurement reporting procedure: It includes the necessary basic measurement
reporting

procedure

and

optional

measurement

reporting

procedure

with

preprocessing. The BTS reports all parameters related to the handover and power
control decision to the BSC through it.
SACCH deactivation procedure: According to the requirements of channel release
procedure specified in TS GSM 04.08, the BSC uses this procedure to deactivate
TRX related SACCH channel.
Radio channel release procedure: The BSC uses this procedure to instruct the BTS
to release a radio channel, which is not in in-service state.
MS power control procedure: The BSS uses this procedure to control the
transmitting power of the MS related to a specific activated channel. MS power
control decision must be implemented in the BSC, and as an optional procedure in
the BTS.
Base station transmission power control procedure: The BSS uses this
procedure to control the transmission power of the activated channel in TRX. The
base station transmitting power control decision should be implemented in the BSC,
or in the BTS.
Connection failure procedure: The BTS uses this procedure to indicate to the BSC
that an activated dedicated channel is already disconnected.
Physical environment content request procedure: The BSC uses this procedure
to obtain the physical parameters of a specific channel. This usually occurs before a
channel change. This is an optional procedure.
SACCH information change procedure: The BSC uses this procedure to instruct
the BTS to change the information (system information) filled in a specific SACCH
channel.

4-10

User Manual
M900/M1800 Base Transceiver Station (BTS30)

System Description
Chapter 4 External Interfaces

III. Common channel management procedures


MS channel request procedure: This procedure is triggered when the TRX detects
random access ("channel request" message) originated from the mobile station.
Paging procedure: It is used to page information on a specific paging sub-channel. It
is used when the MS is the called party, initiated by the MSC and paged through the
BSC. The BSC determines the paging group to be used according to the IMSIs of the
called MSs. The value of this paging group together with the identity of the mobile
station is sent to the BTS, and then, the BTS will page the MS on the related paging
sub-channel.
Immediate assignment procedure: When a mobile station accesses the BTS, the
BSC uses this procedure to assign a dedicated channel for the mobile station
immediately.
Deletion indication procedure: The BTS uses this procedure to indicate to the BSC
that a RIL3-RR immediate assignment message is deleted (i.e., not put in the AGCH
array) due to overloading of the AGCH channel.
CCCH load indication procedure: If the load exceeds the threshold set by OM, the
BTS will use this procedure to instruct the BSC to indicate the load on the CCCH
channel. The indication period is set by OM.
Broadcast information change procedure: The BSC uses this procedure to instruct
the BTS to broadcast new system messages on the BCCH channel.
Short message cell broadcast procedure: The BSC uses this procedure to request
the BTS to issue cell broadcast short messages.

IV. TRX management procedures


SACCH filling information change procedure: The BSC uses this procedure to
indicate the BTS to use new system information on all downlink SACCH channels.
Radio resources indication procedure: The BTS uses this procedure to indicate
the interference level on each idle dedicated channel of TRX to the BSC.
Traffic control procedure: The FUC uses this procedure to indicate the overload
condition of the TRX to the BSC, the cause possibly being CCCH overload, ACCH
overload or processor overload.
Error reporting procedure: The BTS uses this procedure to report the BSC about
detected downlink message errors that can not be reported by other protocols.

4-11

User Manual
M900/M1800 Base Transceiver Station (BTS30)

System Description
Chapter 4 External Interfaces

4.1.5 Layer 3 - Operation and Maintenance


I. Operation and maintenance information model
1)

Managed objects

There are 4 kinds of objects to be managed, which are sites, BTS, TRX, and
channels, as shown in Figure 4-5.

SITE

BTS0

BTS1

...

TRX0

TRX1

Channel 1

...

TRXm

Radio carrier

Baseband transceiver

Channel 0

BTSn

...

Channel 7

Figure 4-5 Basic structure of managed objects


2)

Object addressing

Addressing of network management messages, is realized by means of managed


object types and cases. For each object case in BTS there is a complete layer 2
connection description.
The setup of the first connection uses one (semi-) permanent default TEI.
Subsequent connections use the TEIs provided when setting up TEI procedures.
Object cases can also use layer 3 addresses. The mixed use of layer 2 and layer 3
addressing enables one BTS site to have one or multiple physical links.
3)

Managed object state

Management state
The management state of managed objects is only controlled by the BSC. There are
three kinds of states, including:
z

Locked: indicates that BSC has disconnected all calls going through this
managed object, and no new calls can be connected to this managed object.

Shutting down: indicates that new services can not be connected to this
managed object, but those existing calls will be maintained.
4-12

User Manual
M900/M1800 Base Transceiver Station (BTS30)
z

System Description
Chapter 4 External Interfaces

Unlocked: indicates new services can be connected to this managed object.

Operational state
There are two operational states:
z

Disabled: indicates that resources are completely inoperable, and can no longer
provide services to the users.

Enabled: indicates that all or part of resources are available and can be used.

Available state
The available state is a specific explanation of the operational state. Following are the
different states available in the system:
z

In test: The state during which a resource is being tested. The operational state
is "disabled".

Failed: It shows that the source/object is not working due to some internal error.
The operational state is "disabled".

Power off: This resource needs power supply. Its operation state is "disabled".

Off line: This resource needs manual or automatic operations. Its operation state
is "disabled".

Dependency: If a resource depends on other resources and those resources are


not available then it will also be not available/operable. The operational status is
"disabled".

Degraded: Services provided by this resource are degraded in a certain sense,


such as rate or operational capacity. Its operation state is enabled.

Unequipped: Hardware or software of the managed objects is not equipped. Its


operation state is disabled.

II. Elementary procedure


All procedures are based on formatted O&M messages. Most formatted O&M
messages initiated by BSC or BTS require the peer layer 3 endpoint to give response
or acknowledgment in the form of formatted O&M messages, or single formatted
O&M messages that need not be responded, are called an elementary procedure.
All formatted O&M messages are sent on layer 2 in form of I frames. A group of
procedures, called structured procedures, are based on the combination of several
elementary procedures.
For a specific object, if a certain elementary procedure is not completed, the system
will not start its subsequent elementary procedures.
When there is no response against the formatted operation and maintenance
message from the peer layer 3 before timeout, the elementary procedure is said not
be completed.

4-13

User Manual
M900/M1800 Base Transceiver Station (BTS30)

System Description
Chapter 4 External Interfaces

When the previous elementary procedure has not received any response (ACK or
NACK) before layer 3 timeout, then no subsequent elementary procedure is sent to
this object case. The default timeout for layer 3 is 10s.
If part of an original message is not understood or supported, the whole message is
discarded. If the ACK message returned by an object is a positive reply, it is used to
notify the message sender that the command is or is going to be executed. If the
NACK message (i.e. a negative acknowledgement) is returned, it is used to notify the
message sender that the command execution has failed, and how it failed.
There are mainly the following types of elementary procedures:
z

Software loading management

Abis interface management

Transmission management

Air interface management

Testing management

State management and event reporting

Equipment state management

4.2 Um Interface
4.2.1 Introduction
In a public land mobile network (PLMN), MS is connected via the radio channels to
the fixed network so that a call can be routed to the specific destination. In order to
achieve the interconnection between MS and BSS a set of standard protocols on
radio channel signal transmission are specified, which are called the radio interface,
or simply the Um interface in GSM.
The Um interface is the most important interface in the GSM system. It is necessary
to follow a standard interface so that a complete compatibility can be achieved
between different networks of different manufactures, which is the basic condition for
global roaming. It also determines the spectrum availability of the GSM cellular
system, which is an important measure to evaluate a radio system.
The Um interface is specified by the following features:
z

Channel architecture and access capability

MS-BS communication protocols

Maintenance and operation features

Performance features

Service features

4-14

User Manual
M900/M1800 Base Transceiver Station (BTS30)

System Description
Chapter 4 External Interfaces

4.2.2 Interface Protocol Model


The Um interface can be divided into 3 layers, as shown in Figure 4-6.

Signaling layer (L3)


Data link layer (L2)
Physical layer (L1)

Figure 4-6 Um interface layered structure


The first layer is the physical layer at the bottom. It includes various channels, and
provides basic radio channels for information transmission to the higher layer.
The layer 2 is the data link layer using the LAPDm protocol. It includes various data
transmission structures, and controls data transmission.
The layer 3 is the signaling layer (also called network layer). It includes various
messages and programs, and controls services. L3 includes 3 sub-layers, which are
radio resources management (RR), mobility management (MM), and connection
management (CM).

4.2.3 Physical Layer


I. Working frequency band
Table 4-2 Working frequency bands of BTS30
Uplink (MHz)
900MHz primary
band
1800 MHz band

Duplex spacing
(MHz)

Downlink (MHz)

Freq. spacing
(kHz)

890-915

935-960

45

200

1710-1785

1805-1880

95

200

II. Physical layer interface and services


The interfaces between the physical layer (L1), data link layer (L2) and radio
resources management sub_layer (RR) of L3 and the functions units are shown in
Figure 4-7.

4-15

User Manual
M900/M1800 Base Transceiver Station (BTS30)

System Description
Chapter 4 External Interfaces

Radio resources
management (L3)

Data link layer


MPH - primitive

Other function units

PH - primitive

TCH

Physical layer

Figure 4-7 Physical layer interface


The physical layer provides the following services:
Access capability: The physical layer provides transmission services through a

series of limited logical channels, which are mapped onto the physical channels.
Error code detection: The physical layer provides error-free transmission

services, including error detection and correction.


Ciphering

III. Timeslot and frame structure


Both FDMA and TDMA techniques are used by the Um interface, along with
frequency hopping. The units transmitted on the Um interfaces are called bursts,
each of which comprises over 100 modulated bits. A burst occupies the 200kHz
channel, with a duration of 0.577ms(15/26ms) called burst period (BP). The time and
frequency window it occupies is called timeslot, as shown in Figure 4-8.
Frequency
3

200
kHz

2
1
Time
0

BP
15/26ms

Time slot

Figure 4-8 Concept of timeslot


Each timeslot corresponds to a basic physical channel. Each carrier is divided into 8
timeslots, which can be used by different subscribers. These 8 neighboring timeslots
form a basic unit called frame.
A complete hierarchy of GSM frames is illustrated in Figure 4-9.

4-16

User Manual
M900/M1800 Base Transceiver Station (BTS30)

System Description
Chapter 4 External Interfaces

1 hyperframe=2048 superframe=2715 648TDMA frame (3 h28m53s760ms)


0

TCH
SACCH/T
FACCH

2044

2045

2046

2047

BCCH
CCCH
SDCCH

1 superframe=1326 TDMAframe (6.12s)


1

47

(120ms)

50

49
25

24

1 multiframe=26 TDMA frame


0

48

1 multiframe=51 TDMA frame (3060/13ms)

24

25

49

50

1TDMA=8 TS (120/26=4.61ms)
0

Figure 4-9 Channel frame structure


One TDMA frame has a duration of 4.615ms (120/26ms), consisting of 8 timeslots.
Each timeslot contains 156.25 code elements. An MS sends information on specific
timeslots, and the remaining timeslots are used by other MSs.
Higher order frames, called multiframe, consists of 26 or 51 frames. Multiframe of 26
frames has a duration of 120 ms and carries traffic channel, slow associated control
channel and fast associated control channel. Similarly, a 51-frame multiframe has a
duration of 235.365 ms and carries control channel information.
One superframe consists of 51 traffic multirames or 26 control frames and consists of
5126 TDMA frames with a total duration of 6.12 seconds.
The highest order frame is called hyperframe and consists of 2,048 superframes or
2,715,648 (20485126) frames. The time duration of the hyperframe is 3 hrs, 28 min
and 52.76 sec. The frame number is transferred over SCH channels. Frame numbers
are necessary in the hopping algorithm.

IV. Burst type


Five types of burst structures are defined in the Um interface specifications:
Normal Burst (NB): Used to carry information of traffic channels, and control
channels except for RACH. It contains 116 encrypted bits and 8.25 guard bits.
Frequency-correction burst (FB): Used for MS frequency synchronization. FB is
equivalent to the un-modulated carrier with a +1625/24 frequency offset, it has the
same guard period as NB.

4-17

User Manual
M900/M1800 Base Transceiver Station (BTS30)

System Description
Chapter 4 External Interfaces

Synchronization burst (SB): Used for MS timing synchronization. SB has a long


training sequence bits and can carry the information of TDMA frame numbers (FN)
and BS identification code (BSIC).
Random access burst (AB): Used for MS random access. AB has a longer guard
period (68.25 bits).
Dummy burst (DB): Used to fill in the domain when there is no information sent. DB
has the same structure as NB, except that the bit flow is a fixed bit sequence.

V. Channel type
According to different characteristics, channels are grouped into different types, which
are discussed briefly in the following text.
1)

Traffic channel (TCH)

TCH channel carries voice or user data. A full rate traffic channel (TCH/F) carries the
information with a total bit rate of 22.8kbit/s. On the TCH channel, the following traffic
channels are provided:
z

Full rate speech traffic channel (TCH/FS)

9.6kbit/s full rate data traffic channel (TCH/F9.6)

4.8kbit/s full rate data traffic channel (TCH/F4.8)

2)

2.4kbit/s full rate data traffic channel (TCH/F2.4)


Control channel

Control channels carry signaling and synchronization data. According to different


processing tasks, there are 3 types of control channels: broadcast channel, common
control channel and dedicated control channel.
Broadcast channel (BCH)
A broadcast channel is a point-to-multipoint unidirectional control channel from BS to
MS. It is used to broadcast various types of information to MSs. There are three types
of BCH.
z

FCCH: Frequency-correction channel, used for MS frequency correction.

SCH: Synchronization channel, used for MS frame synchronization and BS


identification.

BCCH: Broadcast control channel, used to send cell information.

Common control channel (CCCH)


A common control channel is a point-to-multipoint bi-directional control channel. It
carries signaling information required by access management functions, as well as
other signaling. CCCH is shared by all MSs in the network. There are 3 types of
CCCH.
z

PCH: Paging channel, used by BTS to page MS.

4-18

User Manual
M900/M1800 Base Transceiver Station (BTS30)
z

System Description
Chapter 4 External Interfaces

RACH: Random access channel, for random access of MS to the network. It is


unidirectional channel from MS to BSS.

AGCH: Access grant channel, used to assign dedicated control channels for the
successfully accessed MS.

Dedicated control channel (DCCH)


A dedicated control channel is a point-to-point bi-directional control channel.
According to the demand of the communication control process, DCCH are assigned
to MS to perform point-to-point signaling transmission with BTS. DCCH includes the
following types:
z

SDCCH/8: Standalone Dedicated Control Channel

SACCH/C8: Slow Associated Control Channel/SDCCH/8

SACCH/TF: Slow Associated Control Channel/TCH/F

FACCH/F: Fast Associated Control Channel/Full Rate

SDCCH/4: Standalone Dedicated Control Channel/BCCH/CCCH

SACCH/C4: Slow Associated Control Channel/SDCCH/4

Cell broadcast channel (CBCH)


A cell broadcast channel is used to broadcast cell short messages in downlink
direction. It carries short message service cell broadcast (SMSCB) information, and
uses the same physical channel as SDCCH.

VI. Channel combinations


Practically different types of logical channels are mapped onto the same physical
channel, this is called channel combination. Some channel combinations are listed
below:
z

TCH/F+FACCH/F+SACCH/TF

FCCH+SCH+BCCH+CCCH

FCCH+SCH+BCCH+CCCH+SDCCH/4+SACCH/C4

BCCH+CCCH

SDCCH/8+SACCH/8

SDCCH/8+SACCH/8+CBCH

FCCH+SCH+BCCH+CCCH+SDCCH/4+SACCH/C4+CBCH

Where CCCH = PCH+RACH+AGCH

4.2.4 Data Link Layer


Data link layer is the second layer of the OSI model. It is served by the physical layer
and serves layer 3. The services access point (SAP) on the data link layer is its
connection point for providing services to layer 3. SAP is identified by the services
access point identifier (SAPI).

4-19

User Manual
M900/M1800 Base Transceiver Station (BTS30)

System Description
Chapter 4 External Interfaces

Each SAP is associated with one or multiple data link connection end points (DLCEP).
Viewed from layer 3, DLCEP is identified by data link connection end point identifier
(DLCEPI). Viewed from layer 2, it is identified by the data link connection identifier
(DLCI).
Communication between the entities on the data link layer is controlled by the
peer-to-peer protocol on this layer. In order to exchange information between two or
multiple layer 3 entities, this layer protocol should be used on the data link layer to set
up connection between layer 3 entities. Such a connection is called a data link
connection (DLC).
Data link layer message units are transferred among layer 2 entities over the physical
layer.
Layer 3 makes service requests to the data link layer in form of service primitives, the
same as the data link layer and physical layer.

I. Functions
1)

General

LAPDm transfers information among layer 3 entities through the radio interface on the
Dm channel.
LAPDm supports multiple layer 3 entities and physical layer entities, and signaling of
BCCH, PCH, AGCH and DCCH.
LAPDm functions include:
z

Provide one or multiple data link connections (DLC) on the Dm channel. These
DLCs are distinguished by data link connection identifiers (DLCI).

Support frame type identification.

Support transparent transmission of layer 3 message units among layer 3


entities.

Sequence control, so as to maintain frame sequence order passing via the DLC.

Detection of format and operation errors on data links.

Traffic control.

Contention decision of data links setup when there are access requests to
RACH.

2)

Operation types

The data link layer used to transfer layer 3 messages has two types of operations i.e.
unacknowledged and acknowledged operations. They can exist on the same Dm
channel.
Unacknowledged operation
In this type of operation, layer 3 information is transferred in the form of unnumbered
information frames (UI). On the data link layer, UI frames are not acknowledged, nor
4-20

User Manual
M900/M1800 Base Transceiver Station (BTS30)

System Description
Chapter 4 External Interfaces

traffic control or error recovery is performed. Unacknowledged operation applies to all


control channels except RACH.
Acknowledged operation
In this type of operation, layer 3 information is transferred in numbered information
frames (I). The data link layer acknowledges all I frames. Unacknowledged frames
are resent for error recovery. In the case the data link layer can not recover the error
codes, it sends an error indication to the management layer. Besides, traffic control
protocols are defined for acknowledged operation. The acknowledged operation
applies to DCCH.
3)

Information transfer modes

On different channels, information transfer modes are different, as described below:


z

Information transfer in BCCH: BCCH exists only in the direction from BTS to MS,
used to broadcast system information messages to MSs. On BCCH, only the
unacknowledged operation is permitted.

Information transfer in PCH+AGCH: only exists in the direction from BTS to MS.
Only the unacknowledged operation applies to PCH+AGCH.

Information

transfer

in

DCCH:

Both

unacknowledged

operation

and

acknowledged operations apply to DCCH, and are determined by layer 3.


4)

Data link release

The multiframe operation can be released as:


z

Normal release in which BTS and MS exchange DISC frames and UA frames or
DM frames, and

Local release with no frame exchange.

Release of the data link layer is initiated by layer 3.

II. Service features


The data link layer provides services to layer 3, and uses the physical layer to provide
services. Interaction among them are described by primitives. The primitive format
between layer 2 and layer 3 is DL_XX_XXX. The primitive format between layer 2 and
the management layer is MDL_XX_XXX. And the primitive format between layer 2
and physical layer is PH_XX_XXX.
1)

Providing services to layer 3

Unacknowledged information transfer service


Features of the unacknowledged information transfer service:
z

Provide data link connection for the unacknowledged transfer of layer 3 message
units among layer 3 entities.

Identification of data link connection end points; it permits a certain layer 3 entity
to identify other layer 3 entities.

4-21

User Manual
M900/M1800 Base Transceiver Station (BTS30)

System Description
Chapter 4 External Interfaces

Sending frames according to message priority.

Messages are not detected on data link layer.

The primitive used in unacknowledged information transfer services is DL_UNIT


DATA_REQUEST/INDICATION. The primitive DL_UNIT DATA_REQUEST is used
when layer 3 requests the unacknowledged operation to transfer messages. At the
receiving terminal, the primitive DL_UNIT DATA_INDICATION is used to indicate the
arrival of this kind of messages.
Acknowledged information transfer service
Acknowledged information transfer defines only the multiframe operation. Its service
features are:
z

Provide data link connection for the acknowledged information transfer among
layer 3 entities.

Identification of data link connection end points, it permits a certain layer 3 entity
to identify other layer 3 entities

Ensure the integrity of data link layer message unit sequences in case of
nonphysical faults.

Notify the corresponding layer entities in case of fault, such as sending


sequence error etc.

Notify the management layer in case non-recoverable errors.

Traffic control.

Send frames according to the indicated SAPI value.

Segmentation and concatenation control functions.

Primitives used for multiframe acknowledged information transfer include:

DL_DATA_REQUEST/INDICATION: used for transmitting and receiving the


information in case layer 3 requests the acknowledged mode.

DL_ESTABLISH_REQUEST/INDICATION/CONFIRM:

for

setup

of

the

multiframe mode.
z

DL_RELEASE_REQUEST/INDICATION/CONFIRM: used for the termination of


the multiframe mode.

Random access process


The

primitive

used

by

the

random

access

procedure

is

DL_RANDOM

ACCESS_INDICATION, which is used for layer 2 to indicate layer 3 the MS random


access message.
2)

Services requested from the physical layer

The physical layer provides the following services to the data link layer:
z

Physical layer connection for transparent frame transfer.

Indication of physical state of the Dm channel.

Sending data link layer message units.

Providing frame synchronization.

4-22

User Manual
M900/M1800 Base Transceiver Station (BTS30)

System Description
Chapter 4 External Interfaces

Error control, ensuring a low error rate in data link layers.

Receiving random access burst.

3)

Management layer services

Primitives used by management layer services:


z

MDL_ERROR_INDICATION, used by layer 2 to report unrecoverable errors to


the management layer.

MDL_RELEASE_REQUEST, used by the management layer to release layer 2


channels.

4.2.5 Signaling Layer


The layer 3 signaling (L3) of the Um interface provides such functions as setup,
maintenance and termination of circuit switching connections in a cellular mobile
network and other public mobile networks connected to it. L3 also provides the
control functions of supplementary services and short messages services. Moreover,
L3 includes mobility management and radio resources management functions.
The layer 3 consists of many functional program blocks. These program blocks
transfer message units that carry various kinds of information among all layer 3
entities and between layer 3 and neighboring layers.
The layer 3 signaling performs the following main functions:
z

Setup, operation and release (radio resources management) of dedicated radio


channel connections.

Location update registration, authentication and TMSI reallocation (mobility


management).

Setup, maintenance and termination (call control) of circuit switched calls.

Support supplementary services.

Support short message services.

Layer 3 consists of 3 sub-layers including connection management (CM), mobility


management (MM) and radio resources management (RR).
The layer 3 functions are performed by the layer 3 signaling protocols between the
mobile station and the network on the two sides of the Um interface. Here, no
consideration is given to the function allocation between different entities inside the
base station system.
Layer 3 and its supported lower layer functions provide higher layers with mobile
network signaling (MNS) services.
Interaction between layer 3 and higher layers and between services interfaces of
layer 2 as well as that among neighboring sub-layers in layer 3 can be described in
primitives and parameters.
On layer 3, information switching among peer entities is performed by 3 sub-layers.
4-23

User Manual
M900/M1800 Base Transceiver Station (BTS30)

System Description
Chapter 4 External Interfaces

I. Structure
Layer 3 contains 3 sub-layers, which are further discussed here:
Radio Resources (RR) management handles the setup, maintenance, and release
of physical channels and logical channels, as well as cross-cell transfer on the
request of CM sub-layer.
Mobility Management (MM) deals with the all necessary functions of mobile features
to support mobile subscribers. It notifies the network when the mobile station is
activated and deactivated, or the location area is changed. It is also responsible for
the security of activated radio channels.
Connection Management (CM) sublayer, consists of 3 functional entities including,
call Control (CC), Short Message Service (SMS) support, and Supplementary Service
(SS) support. These entities have the functions described below:
z

Call Control (CC) deals with all necessary functions to setup or release the
circuit switching connections in which either the mobile subscriber is a caller or a
called party.

Supplementary Service (SS) support deals with all necessary functions to


support GSM supplementary services.

Short Message Service (SMS) support performs all necessary functions to


support point-to-point GSM short message services.

Besides the above functions, layer 3 includes other functions related to message
transmission, such as multiplexing and demultiplexing. These functions are specified
by radio resources management and mobility management. Their task is to determine
message routing according to protocol discriminator (PD) and transaction identifier (TI)
which is on the head of message.
In the uplink direction, MM routing function is to transfer CM entity messages and
messages of MM itself to the service access point of the RR sub-layer, and multiplex
them when multiple messages are transmitted in parallel. The RR routing function is
to distribute messages according to the PD of transferred messages and the actual
channel configuration.
In the downlink direction, RR sub-layer routing function can distribute the messages
from different services access points of layer 2 according to PDs. If the PD equals the
RR, then this message is sent to the RR entity of this sub-layer. The remaining
messages are provided to the MM sub-layer through the service access point
RR-SAP. The routing function of the MM sub-layer is to transfer messages from the
RR sub-layer to the MM entities according to PDs and TIs, or to the various entities of
the CM sub-layer through each MM-SAP.
Figure 4-10 shows the protocol model of the layer 3 signaling.

4-24

User Manual
M900/M1800 Base Transceiver Station (BTS30)

MNCC-SAP

Mobile network
services

System Description
Chapter 4 External Interfaces

MNSS-SAP

MNSMS-SAP

SS

CC
MMCC-SAP

SMS
MMSS-SAP
MMSMS-SAP

MMREG -SAP

L3 signaling

CC

MM

MM

SS

SMS

RR-SAP

RR

PD

..

RR

RR

SAPI 0

SAPI 3

SDCCH
RACCH

SACCH

FACCH
SACCH

BCCH

SDCCH

AGCH+PCH

Figure 4-10 Layer 3 protocol model of the Um interface


The RR sub-layer at the bottom receives services provided by layer 2 through various
service access points (i.e., various types of channels) of layer 2, and provides
services via RR-SAP to the MM sub-layer.
The MM sub-layer provides services to the three entities (CC, SS and SMS) on the
CM sub-layer through different service access points MMCC-SAP, MMSS-SAP and
MMSMS-SAP respectively.
The 3 independent entities on the CM sub-layer provide services to higher layers
through MNCC-SAP, MNSS-SAP and MNSMS-SAP respectively.

II. Service features


1)

Services provided by layer 3 at the MS side include

Registration services, i.e., IMSI attach and detach operations.

Call control services, including normal MOC setup, emergency MOC setup, call
hold, call completion, and call-dependent supplementary services.

4-25

User Manual
M900/M1800 Base Transceiver Station (BTS30)

System Description
Chapter 4 External Interfaces

Support for call-independent supplementary services.

Support for short message services.

2)

Services provided by layer 3 at the network side include

Call control service, including call setup, call hold, call termination and
call-dependent supplementary service support.

Support for call-independent supplementary services.

Support for short message services.

3)

Inter-layer services between the mobile station and network side

Services provided by radio resources management entities (RR)


These services are provided to MM via RR-SAP. They are used for setting up control
channel connections and traffic channel connections, indicating encryption mode,
releasing control channel connection, and controlling data transmission. Figure 4-11
shows the RR sub-layer communication.
MS side

Network side

Mobility
management
sub-layer
RR primitive
RR
SAP
Radio
resources
management
sub-layer

Peer layer protocol


of RR sub-layer

Figure 4-11 RR sub-layer communication


Services provided by mobility management entities (MM)
These services support call control, supplementary services and short messages
services of connection management entities. MM sub-layer communication is shown
in Figure 4-12.

4-26

User Manual
M900/M1800 Base Transceiver Station (BTS30)

System Description
Chapter 4 External Interfaces

MS side
CC

SS

Network side

SMS

CC

SS

SMS

MM peer
layer protocol
Mobility management
sub-layer

Mobility management
sub-layer

Figure 4-12 MM sub-layer communication

4-27

User Manual
M900/M1800 Base Transceiver Station (BTS30)

System Description
Chapter 5 Functions and Performance

Chapter 5 Functions and Performance


The main functions of BTS30 will be introduced in the aspects listed: networking
function, baseband processing, signaling processing and operation and maintenance.

5.1 Networking Function


The BTS30 allows for a flexible networking modes with many built-in transmission
functions. It supports transmission modes such as E1, SDH.

5.1.1 E1 Networking
With one site as a basic unit, M900/M1800 BTS30 supports star, tree, chain and ring
E1 networking topologies, which are illustrated in Figure 5-1.
BTS0
BSC

BTS1

BTS1

BSC

BTS0

BTS3

BTS2

tree networking

star networking

BSC

BTS0

BTS2

BTS1

BSC

chain networking

BTS0

BTS1

ring networking

Figure 5-1 The BTS30 E1 networking mode


Each TMU board provides 4 E1 interfaces and each cabinet can be configured with 2
TMU boards. If one interface is connected to the superior network, a maximum of 7
tributaries can be provided. A comparison between various connection modes is
made in the following.

I. Star networking
Each site is connected directly to BSC by an E1 link, which brings very convenient
maintenance and simple network construction.

5-1

User Manual
M900/M1800 Base Transceiver Station (BTS30)

System Description
Chapter 5 Functions and Performance

Signals pass through very few nodes, which means that no BTS depends on one
another. So in the case of the failure of one BTS, other BTSs will not be affected.
This networking mode is usually applied in densely populated urban areas to facilitate
easy expansion. But this type of networking requires a relatively large number of
transmission links.

II. Tree networking


Tree networking has a complicated network structure. Signals pass through many
nodes, i.e. any abnormality in the superior site will affect the subordinate sites, which
leads to low line reliability.
This type of networking is applicable in vast sparely-populated areas density. But in
such configuration, further expansion is quite difficult because it requires
reconstructing of the network.
Since a BTS usually chooses the phase locking mode for the clock of its superior
network and each time of choosing the phase locking will lead to the degeneration of
clock quality, the number of BSC signals pass through should be restricted (the
number of recommended serial connection layers is not more than five, i.e. the depth
of the tree should not exceed five layers).

III. Chain networking


Along highways and railway tracks where the population density is very low, the most
suitable networking is chain topology. But the problem lies in that in chain networking
the signals pass through many nodes, resulting in poor link reliability. But for these
areas, it has considerable advantages. It saves large quantity of transmission
equipment.
Similar to the tree networking, the number of serial connection layers should be
restricted and the number of the nodes that signals pass through should not exceed
5.

IV. Ring networking


Normally, the ring network is recommended because of its strong self-healing ability.
If the optical fiber in a certain area is damaged, the ring network can be self healed
into a chain network, without affecting services in any sense. The ring networking of
BTS30 should be supported by ABA and ABB.
In practice a cellular network can have one or more than one network topology
according to the actual physical and geographical requirements. So, considerable
amount of transmission equipment investment can be saved and service quality can
be ensured if the networking modes are applied correctly.

5-2

User Manual
M900/M1800 Base Transceiver Station (BTS30)

System Description
Chapter 5 Functions and Performance

5.1.2 SDH Networking


The BTS30 supports built-in transmission equipment. The ASU boards developed by
Huawei are inserted in the common resource frame of the BTS30. The E1 on the
BSC side can access the SDH network via Huaweis OptiX155A transmission
equipment.
Huawei's transmission equipment is adaptable to complex network structures under
the support of its powerful cross-connect capability, abundant flexible interfaces, and
advanced software functions.
As alternative optical transmission equipment of an extremely high performance/
price ratio in OptiX155/622A networking, ASU in actual networking can interwork with
OptiX155/622A/B or Huawei's standard transmission equipment via the STM-1 optical
interface. Besides, according to the transmission networking mode, it can form both
ring and chain topologies.
A chain or ring network topology can be implemented depending on the distribution of
the network routes. Normally, the ring network (as shown in Figure 5-2) is
recommended because of its strong self-healing ability. If the optical fiber in a certain
area is damaged, the ring network can be self healed into a chain network, without
affecting services in any sense.
Normally in areas along railways and highways, chain networking is the most suitable
solution (as shown in Figure 5-3). But even in such cases, if the distance between the
stations is not too far (usually, the maximum distance between 3 stations 80km), and
there are enough optical fibers (4 fibers), ring networking is still recommended.
BTS0
TMU
E1
Optical fiber

BSC

E1

ASU

Optical fiber

ASU

155A

Optical fiber

ASU

E1

Optical fiber

E1

TMU
BTS2

Figure 5-2 SDH ring networking

5-3

TMU

BTS1

User Manual
M900/M1800 Base Transceiver Station (BTS30)

BSC

E1

155A

Optical
fiber

System Description
Chapter 5 Functions and Performance

Optical
fiber

ASU

ASU

E1

E1

TMU

TMU

BTS0

BTS1

Figure 5-3 SDH chain networking

5.1.3 Networking for Satellite Transmission


In sparsely populated areas with poor transportation conditions, it is very hard and
expensive to deploy land transmission network since common transmission
technology and common BTS can hardly meet the requirements in such areas. So in
these areas, satellite transmission is really a cost-effective and efficient solution.
Figure 5-4 shows the networking for satellite transmission.

Ground station

MSC

Ground receive E1
station

BTS

BSC
BTS
SDH/PDH
or microwave/cable

Ground receive E1
station

BTS

BTS

Figure 5-4 Networking for satellite transmission


Networking for satellite transmission is now faced with technological difficulties, which
is much related to some inherent features of satellite transmission, such as long
transmission delay and poor stability of transmission links. These difficulties greatly
5-4

User Manual
M900/M1800 Base Transceiver Station (BTS30)

System Description
Chapter 5 Functions and Performance

constrains the promotion and application of satellite networking. To overcome these


problems, Huawei offers an effective and complete solution as described in the
following.

I. Solution to long transmission delay


z

Transmission delay at the Abis interface

During satellite transmission, there is a fixed delay of hundreds of milliseconds during


the signaling control process on the Abis interface. To avoid timeout release of the
activated call due to transmission delay, multiple timers are used for the signaling
between BTS and BSC.
z

Handover

Due to the delay, the handover command issued from the BSC arrives at the BTS in
hundreds of milliseconds, which leads to the degeneration of the voice quality of the
mobile phone during this period. But in M900/M1800 BTS30, the functions of filtering,
interleaving, PN judgement and prediction of the measurement report can be
adjusted by setting parameters, and a special handover algorithm can be used to
eliminate the impact of time delay.
z

TRAU time adjustment

Satellite transmission delay affects the alignment of the TRAU frames. As the delay in
the common transmission modes is short, the TRAU frame adopts the simple fixed
cyclic frame alignment. While in satellite transmission, the CCU (channel coder unit)
adopts the self-adaptive alignment, which ensures that data can be aligned in a timely
and correct manner in any delay amount, and that the transmission voice is of high
quality.

II. Solution to synchronization problems


The synchronization between BTS and BSC can be greatly affected by the
environmental factors which are stronger during satellite transmission, hence the
voice quality will also be affected.
To solve this problem, the clock source at the BTS side adopts clocks of high
accuracy and advanced APL algorithm. When BTS can synchronize with BSC, it will
work in the synchronous mode.

III. Solution to bit errors


Bit errors will affect system synchronization, voice quality, initiation of calls, call
connection and disconnection. So the reduction of bit errors must start with the
satellite equipment.

5-5

User Manual
M900/M1800 Base Transceiver Station (BTS30)

System Description
Chapter 5 Functions and Performance

With measures implemented in both hardware and software design, Huawei's E-Abis
interface technology has greater error tolerance capability and demonstrates
excellent performance in error and jittery test, and in the actual running environment.

5.2 Main RF Function


The BTS30 RF functions meet the GSM 05.05 specifications. It is characterized by
such advantages such as high sensitivity, flexible configuration, and convenient
operation and maintenance. A brief description of the main RF functions is given
below.

I. High receiving sensitivity


The receiving static sensitivity of the BTS30 is better than -109dBm (for 1800MHz),
and -110dBm (for 900MHz). High sensitivity ensures the high uplink performance of
the BS and it is also one of the preconditions for a better coverage of the BS.

II. Flexible configuration


The BTS30 can support 1~18 TRXs in each sector. The omni or sector cell (over 3
sectors) can be configured according to specific circumstances or the requirements of
the operator. By adjusting the front end gain (such as the tower-top amplifier and the
low noise amplifier), a BTS can also compensate the loss of feeders of different
lengths, thus ensures the consistency in system receiving gain.

III. Convenient operation and maintenance


The RF unit of the BTS30 can be remotely controlled by the OMC to change
transmitting power and transmitting frequencies. Alarm signals generated at the RF
unit are reported to the OMC, so the operating personnel can observe and control the
operation of the RF unit.

IV. Diversity receiving


The BTS30 provides diversity receiving function that is implemented by two
independent receiving equipment, including antennas, tower top amplifier (optional),
feeders, dividers, and receivers.
Both receivers demodulate received signals, which are then sent to the baseband
processing unit for decoding by diversity algorithm. This diversity receiving function
can provide 3~5dB diversity gain.
The application of diversity receiving technology enhances the anti-fading abilities of
the base station receivers, so that the base station can maintain a good receiving
performance even in complex radio environments.

5-6

User Manual
M900/M1800 Base Transceiver Station (BTS30)

System Description
Chapter 5 Functions and Performance

V. RF Hopping
Hopping is another important tool to enhance the performance of the base station. It
enhances not only the anti-fading ability of uplinks and downlinks, but also the
security of communication.
The BTS30 supports both frequency hopping and non-frequency hopping modes.
When frequency hopping is required, the transceiver controlled by BSC can change
its carrier frequency according to a hopping sequence which can be set through OMC.
In non-hopping mode, the transceiver is locked at a certain frequency.
The frequency hopping of the BTS30 is realized through the real-time switchover
between two frequency synthesizers. This implementation mode has two advantages,
one is that the requirement about the rate of the frequency synthesizer can be
reduced, the other is that one of the two frequency synthesizers can function as a
backup to enhance the system reliability in non-frequency hopping mode.
Besides the traditional frame hopping, the BTS30 supports timeslot (TS) hopping,
which further enhances the anti-fading ability.

VI. Power control


The BTS30 provides both static and dynamic power controls.
Static power control is used to adjust the service coverage range of BTS, i.e. it
defines the coverage area of the cell. It has 0~10 power levels in step of 2dB.
When a mobile station moves and the distance to BTS changes, BSC can adjust BTS
transmitting power according to the distances automatically. This process is called
dynamic power control. It has 0~15 different power levels in steps of 2dB.
The power control at each level adopts automatic power closed-loop control (APC),
which ensures a minimum power deviation.
When a timeslot is idle, as there are no downlink signals, BSC will send a command
to BTS to shut down the transmitting power of this timeslot.
These power control functions can enhance the efficiency of transmitters, the
reliability of power amplifier, and can also cut the interference of transmitters to the
minimum.

5.3 Baseband Processing


The baseband processing unit mainly fulfills the functions of the physical layer on the
Um interface, and processes all the full-duplex channel baseband data on a TDMA
frame.

5-7

User Manual
M900/M1800 Base Transceiver Station (BTS30)

System Description
Chapter 5 Functions and Performance

At the transmitting end, it performs rate adaptation, channel encoding and interleaving,
encryption, and the generation of TDMA bursts. At the receiving end, it is responsible
for digital demodulation, decryption, de-interleaving, channel decoding and rate
adaptation.

5.3.1 Channel Types Supported


The baseband processing unit supports the following channel types:
z

TCH/EFS: Enhanced Full-rate Speech Traffic Channel

TCH/FS: Full-rate Speech Traffic Channel

TCH/F9.6: Full-rate Data Traffic Channel (9.6kbits)

TCH/F4.8: Full-rate Data Traffic Channel (4.8kbit/s)

TCH/F2.4: Full-rate Data Traffic Channel ( 2.4kbit/s)

FCCH: Frequency-Correction Channel

SCH: Synchronization Channel

BCCH: Broadcast Control Channel

PCH: Paging Channel

RACH: Random Access Channel

AGCH: Access Grant Channel

SDCCH/8: Standalone Dedicated Control Channel

SACCH/C8: Slow Associated Control Channel/SDCCH/8

SACCH/TF: Slow Associated Control Channel/TCH/F

FACCH/F: Fast Associated Control Channel/Full Rate

SDCCH/4: Standalone Dedicated Control Channel/BCCH/CCCH

SACCH/C4: Slow Associated Control Channel/SDCCH/4

CBCH: Cell Broadcast Channel

5.3.2 Channel Combinations Supported


The baseband processing unit supports the following types of channel combinations:
z

TCH/F+FACCH/F+SACCH/TF

FCCH+SCH+BCCH+CCCH

FCCH+SCH+BCCH+CCCH+SDCCH/4+SACCH/C4

BCCH+CCCH

SDCCH/8+SACCH/8

SDCCH/8+SACCH/8+CBCH

FCCH+SCH+BCCH+CCCH+SDCCH/4+SACCH/C4+CBCH

Here CCCH=PCH+RACH+AGCH

5.4 Signaling Processing


The BTS30 signaling processing mainly fulfills:

5-8

User Manual
M900/M1800 Base Transceiver Station (BTS30)

System Description
Chapter 5 Functions and Performance

The interworking between MS and BSS/NSS on the Um interface.

Management function of the radio resources under the control of the BSC.

The BTS30 signaling processing includes radio link management, dedicated channel
management, common channel management and TRX management.

I. Radio link layer management procedures


Link establishment indication procedure: Through this procedure BTS indicates to
the BSC that a multiframe data link has been established at the initiative of an MS.
BSC can use this indication to set up an SCCP connection to MSC.
Link establishment request procedure: Through this procedure BSC request the
setup of a multiframe data link on the radio channel.
Link release indication procedure: Through this procedure BTS indicates to BSC
that a radio link has been released at the initiative of an MS.
Link release request procedure: Through this procedure BSC requests the BTS to
release a radio link.
Transfer procedure of a transparent L3-message in acknowledged mode:
Through this procedure BSC requests the BTS to send a transparent Um interface
RIL3 message in acknowledged mode.
Receive procedure of a transparent L3-message in acknowledged mode:
Through this procedure BTS indicates the BSC to receive a transparent Um interface
RIL3 message in acknowledged mode.
Transfer procedure of a transparent L3-message in unacknowledged mode:
Through this procedure BSC requests the BTS to send a transparent Um interface
RIL3 message in non-acknowledged mode.
Receive procedure of a transparent L3-message in unacknowledged mode:
Through this procedure BTS indicates the BSC to receive a transparent Um interface
RIL3 message in non-acknowledged mode.
Link error indication procedure: Through this procedure BTS indicates BSC incase
of any abnormality in the radio link layer.

II. Dedicated channel management procedures


Channel activation procedure: Through which the BSC sends commands to BTS to
activate a dedicated channel for a certain MS. After the activation, BSC assigns the
channel to the MS through commands such as Immediate Assign, Assign Command,
Additional Assignment or Handover commands.

5-9

User Manual
M900/M1800 Base Transceiver Station (BTS30)

System Description
Chapter 5 Functions and Performance

Channel mode modify procedure: This procedure is used by BSC to request BTS
to change the mode of the activated channel.
Handover detection procedure: This procedure is used between the target BTS and
target BSC to detect the handover access of MS.
Start ciphering procedure: Used for starting the ciphering procedure defined in TS
GSM 04.08.
Measurement reporting procedure: It includes the necessary basic measurement
reporting

procedure

and

optional

measurement

reporting

procedure

with

preprocessing. BTS reports all parameters related to handover decision to the BSC
through it.
SACCH deactivation procedure: According to the requirements of channel release
procedure specified in TS GSM 04.08, BSC uses this procedure to deactivate TRX
related SACCH channel.
Radio channel release procedure: BSC uses this procedure to instruct BTS to
release a radio channel, which is not in use state.
MS power control procedure: BSS uses this procedure to control the transmitting
power of the MS related to a specific activated channel. MS power control decision
must be implemented in BSC, and as an optional procedure in BTS.
Base station transmission power control procedure: BSS uses this procedure to
control the transmission power of the activated channel in TRX. The base station
transmitting power control decision should be implemented in BSC, or in BTS.
Connection failure procedure: BTS uses this procedure to indicate to BSC that an
activated dedicated channel is already disconnected.
Physical environment content request procedure: BSC uses this procedure to
obtain the physical parameters of a specific channel. This usually occurs before a
channel change. This is an optional procedure.
SACCH information change procedure: BSC uses this procedure to instruct BTS to
change the information (system information) filled in a specific SACCH channel.

III. Common channel management procedures


MS channel request procedure: This procedure is triggered when TRX detects
random access ("channel request" message) from the mobile station.
Paging procedure: It is used to page information on a specific paging sub-channel. It
is initiated by MSC and paged through BSC. BSC determines the paging group to be
used according to the IMSI of the called MS. The value of this paging group together
with the identity of the mobile station is sent to BTS.

5-10

User Manual
M900/M1800 Base Transceiver Station (BTS30)

System Description
Chapter 5 Functions and Performance

Immediate assignment procedure: When a mobile station accesses BTS, BSC


uses this procedure to assign a dedicated channel for the mobile station immediately.
Deletion indication procedure: BTS uses this procedure to indicate to BSC that a
RIL3-RR immediate assignment message is deleted (i.e., not put in the AGCH array)
due to overloading of the AGCH channel.
CCCH load indication procedure: BTS uses this procedure to indicate to BSC the
load on a specific CCCH channel.
Broadcast information change procedure: BSC uses this procedure to instruct the
BTS to broadcast new system messages on the BCCH channel.
Short message cell broadcast procedure: BSC uses this procedure to request
BTS to issue cell broadcast short messages.

IV. TRX management procedures


SACCH filling information change procedure: BSC uses this procedure to indicate
BTS to use new system information on all downlink SACCH channels.
Radio resources indication procedure: BTS uses this procedure to indicate the
interference level on each idle dedicated channel of TRX to BSC.
Traffic control procedure: FUC uses this procedure to indicate the overload
condition of TRX to BSC, the cause may be CCCH overload, ACCH overload or
processor overload.
Error reporting procedure: BTS uses this procedure to report the BSC about
detected downlink message errors that can not be reported by other protocols.

5.5 Operation and Maintenance


The BTS30 also provides powerful operation and maintenance functions. It has four
major functional modules, including the software loading, the configuration of object
attributes of the base station, the equipment management and the operational status
monitoring.
Software loading: BSC stores copies of software of all BTS boards. So when BTS
operates for the first time after the installation, BTS successfully resets or BTS
software is upgraded, the BSC will performs software loading to BTS.
Configuration management: including attributes configuration of such managed
objects as sites, cells, radio carriers, and channels, as well as the management of
Abis interface and transmission equipment.
Equipment management: including the detection of equipment switchover, resetting,
and faults, performance testing, statistics measurement and status event reporting.
5-11

User Manual
M900/M1800 Base Transceiver Station (BTS30)

System Description
Chapter 5 Functions and Performance

Running status monitoring: including the monitoring and recording of various


message flows, status conversion processes, and change of environment parameters
during the operation of the base stations.

5.5.1 Software Loading


I. TMU software loading
After the power on or manual/auto restart of the TMU, it will request the BSC for the
software version confirmation to ensure that the version acknowledged by the BSC is
in operation. If the version number is incorrect, the BSC will load the correct version
to the TMU.
All software loaded from the BSC to the TMU is stored in the Flash RAM of the TMU.
When the BSC requests the activation, the TMU will execute the operation of the new
software version.

II. Software loading from TMU to boards


After the manual/auto resetting, the board will send the software version confirmation
request to TMU. TMU checks whether its version number is identical to that stored in
the FLASH MEMORY. If it is, TMU will directly activate the version of this software. If
it is not, TMU will load the version previously saved to the board, so as to ensure that
the proper version is loaded and operating in this board. In addition, the BSC can also
update the software version of the board through TMU.
The validity of the software is of great importance, therefore, both layer 2 and layer 3
have the checking and reloading system to guarantee high reliability.

III. Centralized management of software versions


To facilitate software updating, this function is provided to load software from BSC or
MMI to the boards of BTS. As mentioned before, this function is implemented through
the TMU. A TMU stores two versions of the software for the boards TMU, TBU
(including SCP, CHDSP and EQDSP) and STU (including SCP and DSP), etc., and
their version number is recorded respectively. The BSC or MMI can activate either of
the two software versions to run or load new versions. The BSC or MMI can get the
software version information of all the boards from the TMU, and display the
information at the graphical interface.

5-12

User Manual
M900/M1800 Base Transceiver Station (BTS30)

System Description
Chapter 5 Functions and Performance

5.5.2 Abis Interface Management


I. Abis interface management
Abis interface is a standard interface between BTS and BSC, which takes the TS
switching equipment as the main object of its management. It also involves the
management of part of the data link layers.
The Abis interface management covers two aspects: the connection management of
layer 1 and management of part of the signaling link layer. The Abis interface TS
switching equipment of the BTS30 fulfills the switching between the E1 line and HW
line inside the rack to accomplish the layer 1 connection of the link.
Signaling link connections should also be established on layer 2.
The Abis interface management has the following functions:
z

TEI set up (for both OML and RSL)

Signaling channel connection set up

Signaling channel disconnection

Traffic channel connection set up

Traffic channel disconnection

II. Transmission management


Transmission here refers to the cascade transmission of E1 signals. As both the
BTS30 E1 transmission and the Abis timeslot switching are carried out by BIU,
implementation of this function is similar to that of Abis interface management. Link
connection on layer 1 is set up by changing the timeslot switching configurations
between BIU and E1 lines.
One BSC normally can carry multiple SITEs. Between BSC and SITEs, multiple
connection modes are supported, such as star, chain, tree, ring and hybrid networking.
Except star networking, all other modes involve the cascade management of E1
signals, i.e., forwarding traffic and signaling to subsequent sites.
The ring connection mode also involves loop management.
Transmission management has the following functions:
z

Multi-point connection set up

Multi-point connection deletion

Ring connection set up

Ring connection deletion

5-13

User Manual
M900/M1800 Base Transceiver Station (BTS30)

System Description
Chapter 5 Functions and Performance

5.5.3 Air Interface Management


The air interface management mainly involves the parameter configuration that
determine the physical channel and the logical channel of the air interface, including
the configuration of the attributes of the cell, carrier frequency and transmission
channels.
The physical channel parameters of the air interface mainly include the carrier and
the timeslot parameters, which are configured according to the carrier attributes.
The logical channel parameters mainly include the channel types, and the messages
appeared on them, especially the system message, which are determined by the
attributes of both the channel and the cell.

I. BTS attributes setting


BTS attributes refer to the parameters applicable to the whole cell, but not related to
specific carriers and channels, including:
1)

Interference level limit

2)

Interference average value

3)

Connection failure decision threshold: the BER or the receiving level threshold.

4)

T200, including the T200 timing values of the following channels:

SDCCH

FACCH (full rate)

FACCH (half rate)

SACCH (relevant to TCH, SAPI=0)

SACCH (relevant to SDCCH)

SDCCH (SAPI=3)

SACCH (relevant to TCH, SAPI=3)

5)

Maximum timing advance

6)

Overload indication period

7)

CCCH load threshold

8)

CCCH load indication period

9)

RACH busy decision threshold

10) RACH load average TS number


11) BTS air timer
12) Maximum number of physical channel message retransmissions (Ny1)
13) BCCH absolute RF number
14) Base station identification code (BSIC)
15) Configuration start time

5-14

User Manual
M900/M1800 Base Transceiver Station (BTS30)

System Description
Chapter 5 Functions and Performance

II. Carrier frequency attributes setting


The carrier frequency attributes are the parameters relevant to the specific carrier
frequency, which include:
z

Maximal power descending of the RF

RF absolute channel numbers table

III. Channel attributes setting


The channel attributes refer to the parameters related to the specific channel,
including:
z

Channel combination mode

Frequency hopping serial number

Mobile allocation index offset (MAIO)

RF absolute channel numbers table

Configuration start time

Training sequence number

IV. Air interface management extension


The operation and maintenance protocol of the base stations is mainly stipulated in
GSM 12.21 standards. This protocol is not yet perfect, and should be extended in
actual applications.
The BTS30 protocol extension includes two aspects: the setting of BTS extended
attributes (frequency hopping modes etc.), and the setting of sites extended attributes,
including environment parameters and clock hardware parameters (phase locking
reference source, DAC values).

5.5.4 Testing Management


Testing management is an important function of the base station maintenance. With
the help of this function, the user can determine and locate the fault in BTS. During
the normal operation of a base station, periodic tests should also be carried out over
certain items to trace the performance of the base stations and to predict the possible
faults of base stations.
It must be noted that with the increasing of base station maintenance functions,
demands for testing functions become more stringent, which constitutes one of the
most extendable parts of operation and maintenance functions.
The BTS30 provides powerful testing functions with a large variety of test items
provided, mainly including:
1)

TRX Abis link testing

2)

Free burst testing


5-15

User Manual
M900/M1800 Base Transceiver Station (BTS30)

System Description
Chapter 5 Functions and Performance

3)

E1 self-loop testing

4)

Functional object self-test, including:

Site self-test

Cell self-test

TRX self-test

Board self-test

5.5.5 Status Management


The status of various logical objects and physical objects of the base station is stored
in 3 entities, i.e., BSC, TMU, and boards. The correctness and consistency of states
stored in these 3 entities is one of the basic conditions for the normal operation of the
base station.
The base station status management mainly involves 3 kinds of status: management
status, operation status, and availability status. Management status is required to
remain consistent from top to bottom, i.e., from BSC, TMU to boards, while operation
status is required to remain consistent from bottom to top. Availability status is the
specific explanation of operation status.
Consistency of these 3 kinds of states is vitally important, for inconsistency will result
in resources waste as some available channels might not be distributed, or abnormal
service provision occurs due to possible distribution of damaged channels.
TMU monitors the setup and disconnection of various communication links, and
checks the status of the boards in realtime. If any change occurs, it will immediately
report the change to BSC and MMI, and display it through the OMC.

5.5.6 Processing of Event Reports


Event report mainly refers to the report of internal base station errors, or fault reports
generated during alarming.
Considering the importance of such reports, it must be ensured that each command
and report reaches the destination and is correctly explained, i.e., there must be a
response mechanism. The response mechanism from top to bottom is stipulated in
GSM protocol 12.21, but the response mechanism from bottom to top is not yet
specified in the protocol. For the sake of simplicity and to save command codes, the
upward reports are directly returned as responses.
A base station can be managed through BSC and MMI. For inquiry operations, both
can perform the operations simultaneously. For operations that may change the
running status of the base station (e.g., parameters setting), only the one with the
management authority can perform such operations. By default, BSC enjoys the
management authority.

5-16

User Manual
M900/M1800 Base Transceiver Station (BTS30)

System Description
Chapter 5 Functions and Performance

To obtain the management authority, MMI must first send to BSC a management
status changing request. After BSC confirms the request, it will issue a management
status changing command, so as to shift the management authority to MMI. When
MMI operation ends, it must request BSC to take back its management authority.
The BTS30 may involve two kinds of alarms: board alarms and environment alarms.

I. Board alarms
When any board alarm occurs or disappears, the board reports it to TMU, and TMU
will report it to BSC or MMI immediately. According to the cause, an alarm may be
classified into one of the following categories:
Transmission

and

communication

alarms:

This

mainly

refers

to

an

out-of-synchronization alarm of either the local end or remote end of E1 port, or loop
interruption alarm.
Clock alarms: various kinds of clock source alarms and TBPU clock alarms.
Power supply alarm: over/under voltage alarms of power supply of the carrier part
and power supply fault alarms.
General alarms: hardware faults of various boards, internal bus alarms, and software
running errors.
After receiving alarm messages from a board, TMU will take the corresponding
measures according to the alarm severity. For a critical alarm, immediate measures
will be taken to reduce any possible damage, such as resetting the board or switching
off the carrier power supply, etc.
TMU reports all the alarms to BSC and MMI to display them at the graphic interface.

II. Environment alarms


Environment alarms (including fire, smog, intruder, water, temperature and humidity
etc.) are collected by the environment monitoring instrument. On receipt of an alarm,
TMU will activate the attached device(s) through the alarm box, such as
air-conditioner, fire-extinguisher, smoke-removing devices, and dehumidifier. Also, it
will report it to BSC and MMI for it to be displayed at the graphic interface.

5.5.7 Equipment Management


I. Equipment switchover
To guarantee the system reliability, the BTS30 provides active/standby configuration
for important components. In case of any abnormality in the active boards, the system
can shift the service to the standby boards automatically or manually.
5-17

User Manual
M900/M1800 Base Transceiver Station (BTS30)

System Description
Chapter 5 Functions and Performance

In addition, the BSC can send a switchover command to perform switchover on the
object desired. When a board receives a switchover command from BSC, activated
by this command, it directly receives commands from the TMU to initiate switchover.
Otherwise, the switchover is initiated by the board itself, and will be directly reported
after the switchover.

II. Operation starting


The operation of the equipment involves the steps and synchronization during the
starting. The operation starting function is used to start the equipment at the proper
time.

III. Re-initialization
In some cases, the running object may require re-initialization, which is mostly
caused by the failure of the equipment or the need to reconfigure large quantity of
data. And it can be initiated by the command from BSC via TMU.

IV. Configuration of site output (external devices)


There may be some external devices for each BTS, such as air-conditioner,
dehumidifier, humidifier, and controllable camera etc. The controlling over these
devices can be regarded as output variables.

V. Power supply management commands


When some critical faults occur to carrier equipment, such as too high temperature or
standing wave ratio exceeding the threshold, make the equipment quit serving any
more or power off the carrier part (including the power amplifier) so as to prevent it
from being completely damaged. In case of mains power supply failure, the base
station can turn off some TRXs, and keep only the BCCH carrier working to handle
the necessary data so as to reduce the voice services and prolong the service of
standby power supply.

VI. Software and hardware version's query


During the maintenance, for example, when the software is being updated, usually
the software and hardware version number shall be checked. After TMU is started,
the software and hardware version number shall be read so as to upgrade the
database for future query, and to judge whether the version number is identical with
the configuration or not.

5-18

User Manual
M900/M1800 Base Transceiver Station (BTS30)

System Description
Chapter 5 Functions and Performance

VII. Board re-initialization after resetting


After being reset, boards will request for re-initialization. The re-initialization process
is to configure the required parameters first, and then restart the board.

VIII. Processing of board and environment alarms


Base station alarms mainly includes two types: board alarms and environment alarms.
When there is any abnormality in board itself or its resources, a board running failure
alarm will be reported to TMU. Environment alarms are collected by TMU and alarm
box. TMU reports all alarm messages timely to BSC and take necessary emergency
processing measures.

5.5.8 Site Configuration


I. Configuration of logical parameters
The configuration of site logical parameters is to determine such basic site
configuration parameters as the number of sectors, baseband processing units and
carrier units etc. Logical units can be added or deleted during future network
expansion or network optimization.

II. Configuration of physical boards


Site physical board configuration is to configure, add or delete given boards for sites
in configuration tables.

5.5.9 Tracing Operations


I. Interface tracing
It is usually necessary to trace various interface messages during operation, for the
sake of convenient debugging, detecting and locating of faults occurred during normal
operation.
The interfaces now available for tracing include various interfaces between the TMU
layer 3 and its lower levels, and the air interface (Um interface). What's more, other
interfaces can be added to the tracing list for the sake of convenient debugging.

II. Resource tracing


The resource utilization conditions are the important parameters for analyzing the
program efficiency and status, and important indexes for testing whether the system

5-19

User Manual
M900/M1800 Base Transceiver Station (BTS30)

System Description
Chapter 5 Functions and Performance

meets the requirements or not. Resource tracing can be started or stopped according
to the actual need to adjust the traffic flow.

III. System logs


To keep system operation process records is one of the best way to trace the errors.
The TMU software log mainly keeps two types of information: one is the interface
message mentioned above, and the other is the program running errors. The board
log is reported to the TMU, from which it is transferred transparently to the BSC or
saved in the log buffer area.

5.5.10 Other Functions


I. Attributes query
Most of the attributes of managed objects are configured by the BSC during base
station initialization, and part of them may be modified during the operation. Any of
the attributes can be queried during maintenance, which is helpful to decide the
operation status of the base station.

II. Alarm threshold setting


Different threshold values can be set through OMC for the protection of different
objects so as to avoid system down. For example, alarm limits can be set on the RF
working power and the standing-wave ratio etc.

III. OML link test


In order to guarantee the proper operation of OML link and to supervise its status, the
BSC transmits some routine messages to the TMU to supervise this link. In addition,
the BSC realtime clock is also transmitted, which is used as the TMU superior level
clock reference.

IV. Transparent commands


For debugging convenience and adding of new functions, transparent commands can
be used to flexibly transfer some customized commands or debugging commands to
some designated boards.

V. Query on-site board


The on-site board refers to the board which has been installed in the slot and hasnt
been configured on the data configuration console. This kind of boards can be
queried on the board maintenance panel and are differentiated by color.

5-20

User Manual
M900/M1800 Base Transceiver Station (BTS30)

System Description
Chapter 5 Functions and Performance

5.6 System Indices


I. Power consumption
Test conditions: temperature: 25C; relative humidity: 80%; power amplifier power
output: 40W. Measured at the inlet of the cabinet power supply (the output of the
primary power supply) 30 minutes after the power-on and normal working of the
system.
The power consumption of the cabinet in different configurations are listed in
Table 5-1.
Table 5-1 Power consumption of the BTS30 in different configurations

Number of TRXs

Voltage (V)

Current (A)

Power consumption (W)

26.8

44.3

1187

26.8

37.8

1013

26.8

31.2

836

26.8

24.7

662

26.8

17.2

461

26.8

10.7

287

II. Clock
Frequency: 1.3107 Hz, with the precision upon leaving the factory better than 0.1
Hz.
Frequency deviation varied with temperature changes: < 0.05 ppm (temperature
from 0C to 70C). Annual aging rate: < 0.1 ppm.

III. Environmental conditions


Since the BTS30 is an indoor base station, the automatic air-conditioning system is
required in the room.
It can work smoothly within the temperature range -5C~+45C under 15-85%
relative humidity.
The environmental alarm box is available to supervises the environmental parameters
and report the alarms.

5-21

User Manual
M900/M1800 Base Transceiver Station (BTS30)

System Description
Chapter 5 Functions and Performance

IV. System reliability


Table 5-2 The mean time between failures (MTBF) of BTS30
No.

Cell configuration

Failure rate accumulated (10-6h)

MTBF(h)

O(1)

37.452

35000

O(2)

33.996

30000

S(2/2/2)

56.560

18000

S(4/4/4)

75.414

15000

S(6/6/6)

97.834

11000

V. Physical characteristics
Dimensions: 1600 mm (H) 600 mm (W) 450 mm (D).
Weight:

Empty cabinet 85 kg.


Fully configured cabinet 180kg.

5.7 Radio Interface Indices


I. The functional frequencies of M900 BTS30

Primary band

Uplink (MHz)

Downlink (MHz)

890-915

935-960

II. The functional frequencies of M1800 BTS30

Primary band

Up Link (MHz)

Down Link (MHz)

1710-1785

1805-1880

5.7.1 Receivers
I. Receiving sensitivity
Testing conditions: FCH/FS channel, no frequency hopping, BER and frame deletion
rate meet the requirements of Table 1 of GSM 05.05 standards.
1)

M900 BTS

Static sensitivity: better than -110dBm.

Multipath sensitivity: better than -104dBm under TU3, TU50, RA250 and HT100
transmission conditions.
5-22

User Manual
M900/M1800 Base Transceiver Station (BTS30)

System Description
Chapter 5 Functions and Performance

2)

M1800 BTS

Static sensitivity: better than -109dBm.

Multipath sensitivity: better than -104dBm under TU3, TU50, RA250 and HT100
transmission conditions.

II. Receiver input level range


1)

M900 BTS

In the static transmission condition, the relationship between the input levels and the
M900 BTS Type II BER measured on the TCH/FS channel is given in Table 5-3:
Table 5-3 Relationship between the M900 BTS Type II BER and input levels
Input level range

Static sensitivity level~-84dBm

-84dBm~-40dBm

-40dBm~-15dBm

Type II BER

<2 %

<10-4

<10-3

2)

M1800 BTS

In the static transmission condition, the relationship between input levels and M1800
BTS Type II BER measured on the TCH/FS channel is given in Table 5-4:
Table 5-4 Relationship between the M1800 BTS Type II BER and input levels
Input level range

Static sensitivity level~-84dBm

-84dBm~-40dBm

-40dBm~-23dBm

Type II BER

<2 %

<10-4

<10-3

III. Blocking features


1)

M900 BTS

When the sine wave interference signals with frequency and level as shown in
Table 5-5 are input together with the -101dBm useful signals into the M900 BTS
receiver, the BER still meets the requirements.
Table 5-5 Frequency and level of M900 BTS sine wave interference signals
Frequency (inband)

600kHz |f-f0|<800kHz

800kHz |f-f0|<3.0MHz

3.0MHz |f-f0|

Level (dBm)

-26

-16

-13

Frequency (outband)

0.1MHz f<870MHz

925MHz f<12750MHz

Level (dBm)

Where f0 is the useful signal frequency, and f is the interference signal frequency.

5-23

User Manual
M900/M1800 Base Transceiver Station (BTS30)

2)

System Description
Chapter 5 Functions and Performance

M1800 BTS

When the sine wave interference signals with frequency and voltage level as shown
in Table 5-6 are input together with the -101dBm useful signals into the M1800 BTS
receiver, the BER still meets requirements
Table 5-6 Frequency and level of M1800 BTS sine wave interference signals
Frequency (inband)

600kHz |f-f0|<800kHz

800kHz |f-f0|<3.0MHz

3.0MHz |f-f0|

Level (dBm)

-35

-25

-25

Frequency (outband)

0.1MHz f<1690MHz

1805MHz f<12750MHz

Level (dBm)

Where f0 is the useful signal frequency, and f is the interference signal frequency.

IV. C/I and bit error code rate


When the useful signal is -84dBm, relationship between the TCH/FS channel TYPE II
BER and C/I measured under the non-hopping multipath condition is shown as in
Table 5-7. This relationship in M900 is the same as that in M1800.
Table 5-7 Relationship between the BTS TYPE II BER and C/I
Interference frequency

C/I(dB)

TCH/FS TYPE II BER

f = f0

TU1.5 RBER<4.0%

| f - f0| = 200kHz

-9

TU50 RBER<8.1%

| f - f0| = 400kHz

-41

TU50 RBER< 8.1%

f is the random continuous GSM modulated interference signal frequency, and f0 is


the useful signal frequency.

V. Inter-modulation response suppression


1)

M900 BTS

For M900 BTS, when the useful signals with a sensitivity 3dB higher than the
reference sensitivity are input to the receiver simultaneously with two -43dBm
interference signals, the TYPE II BER measured on the TCH/FS channel is better
than 2%, and the carrier relationship and modulation forms of interference signals
satisfy GSM 11.21 specifications.
2)

M1800 BTS

For M1800 BTS, when the useful signals with a sensitivity 3dB higher than the
reference sensitivity are input to the receiver simultaneously with two -49dBm

5-24

User Manual
M900/M1800 Base Transceiver Station (BTS30)

System Description
Chapter 5 Functions and Performance

interference signals, the TYPE II BER measured on the TCH/FS channel is better
than 2%, and the carrier relationship and modulation forms of interference signals
meet GSM 11.20 specifications.

VI. Stray radiation


The testing result is the same for both M900 BTS and M1800 BTS:
z

Radiation within 9kHz~1GHz: <-57dBm

Radiation within 1GHz~12.75GHz: <-47dBm

5.7.2 Transmitters
I. Average carrier frequency power
For M900 BTS and M1800 BTS, the average carrier frequency power of the
transmitter measured at the combiner input end is 46dBm with a tolerance of 1dBm.

II. Power Control


1)

Static power control

Both the M900 BTS and M1800 BTS transmitters have 10 levels for static power
adjustment, with a step length of 21dB. On each static power level, the absolute
precision is better than 3dB.
2)

Dynamic power control

Both the M900 BTS and M1800 BTS transmitters have 15 levels for dynamic power
adjustment, with a step length of 21.5dB. On each dynamic power level, the
absolute precision is better than 3dB.

III. Carrier frequency envelope


Power flatness of the 147 bit useful part: <1dB.
Cutoff timeslot power: <-30dBc.
The ramping up and down of the power bursts is in accordance with the
power-versus-time template (Figure 5-5).

5-25

User Manual
M900/M1800 Base Transceiver Station (BTS30)

System Description
Chapter 5 Functions and Performance

dB
+4
+1
-1
-6
-30

542.8

10 8 10

10 8 10

t
(us)

Figure 5-5 Power-versus-time template


Note: Testing results are the same for both M900 and M1800 BTSs.

IV. Transmission spectrum


1)

Modulated spectrum

Power of various deviating frequency points of M900 and M1800 BTSs are shown in
Table 5-8 and Table 5-9 respectively.
Table 5-8 Power of various deviating frequency points of M900 BTS
Frequency
deviation

100kHz

200kHz

250kHz

400kHz

600kHz
~1.2MHz

1.2MHz
~1.8MHz

1.8MHz
~6MHz

6MHz

Max. power
level (dBc)
at relative
carrier

0.5

-30

-33

-60

-70

-73

-75

-80

Table 5-9 Power of various deviating frequency points of M1800 BTS


Frequency
deviation

100kHz

200kHz

250kHz

400kHz

600kHz
~1.2MHz

1.2MHz
~1.8MHz

1.8MHz
~6MHz

6MHz

Max. power
level (dBc)
at relative
carrier

0.5

-30

-33

-60

-70

-73

-75

-80

2)

Transient spectrum

For M900 and M1800 BTSs, the power levels caused by handover at the various
deviating frequency points are shown in Table 5-10 and Table 5-11 respectively.

5-26

User Manual
M900/M1800 Base Transceiver Station (BTS30)

System Description
Chapter 5 Functions and Performance

Table 5-10 Power levels of M900 BTS caused by handover at various deviating frequency points
Frequency deviation
Maximum power level (dBc) of
relative carrier

400kHz
-57

600kHz
-67

1.2MHz
-74

1.8MHz
-74

Table 5-11 Power levels of M1800 BTS caused by handover at various deviating frequency points
Frequency deviation
Maximum power level (dBc) of
relative carrier

400kHz
-50

600kHz
-58

1.2MHz
-66

1.8MHz
-66

V. Intermodulation suppression
1)

M900 BTS

For interference signals coming from the antenna into the transmitter, the
intermodulation signal suppression of the transmitter is over 70dBc (or under
-36dBm), and the levels of the 3rd order and 5th order intermodulation signals falling
within the 890~915MHz frequency band are under -98dBm.
The suppression of the intermodulated signal after multi-carrier combination is over
70dBc (or under -36dBm) when it falls within the 935MHz~960MHz frequency band,
and that falling within the 890MHz~915MHz frequency band has an output level
under -98dBm.
2)

M1800 BTS

For interference signals coming from the antenna into the transmitter, the
intermodulation signal suppression of the transmitter is over 70dBc (or under
-36dBm), and the levels of the 3rd order and 5th order intermodulation signals falling
within the 1710~1785MHz frequency band are under -98dBm.
The suppression of the intermodulated signal after multi-carrier combination is over
70dBc (or under -36dBm) when it falls within the 1805MHz~1880MHz frequency band,
and that falling within the 1710MHz~1785MHz frequency band has an output level
under -98dBm.

VI. Spurious emission


Conductive stray radiation measured at antenna connection points meets the
following requirements:
1)

M900 BTS

9kHz~1GHz: <-36dBm

890MHz~915MHz: <-98dBm

5-27

User Manual
M900/M1800 Base Transceiver Station (BTS30)

System Description
Chapter 5 Functions and Performance

1GHz~12.75GHz: <-30dBm

2)

M1800 BTS

9kHz~1GHz: <-36dBm

1710MHz~1785MHz: <-98dBm

1GHz~12.75GHz: <-30dBm

VII. Frequency deviation and phase deviation


Transmitting signal frequency deviation: <0.05ppm
Transmitting signal phase deviation: <5(rms)
<20 (peak)
Note: For M900 BTS and M1800 BTS, the testing results are same.

5-28

User Manual
M900/M1800 Base Transceiver Station (BTS30)

System Description
Chapter 6 Configuration and Typical Application

Chapter 6 Configuration and Typical Application


6.1 Configuration
We have already discussed that the BTS30 offers a variety of networking options and
can be configured flexibly in different network topologies according to the user
requirements. In the following chapter we will discuss the configuration of the BTS30
from several aspects.

6.1.1 Cell Configuration


Synchronous cells can be defined as cells that are using the same clock source
carriers. A synchronous cell can be an omni cell, or a group of sectors. The BTS30
can support the following synchronous cell configurations:
z

Synchronous omni cell, 1~18 TRXs.

Synchronous 2 sector-cell, 1+1~18+18 TRXs.

Synchronous 3 sector-cell, 1+1+1~18+18+18 TRXs.

Over-3-sector cells if required by customer.

A single BTS30 cabinet of the BTS30 may contain a maximum of 6 TRXs. A


synchronous cell with more than 6 TRXs can be configured in more than one cabinets,
which can be called "combined cabinet configuration". Combined cabinet
configuration means that one basic cabinet supports (maximum) one extension
cabinet, and the cabinets are connected via clock cables, O&M cables, etc.
In combined cabinet configuration, the cabinet with TMU board is called the "basic
cabinets", and the cabinet without TMU board is called the "extension cabinet".
The extension cabinet and the basic cabinet share the same TMU board. Clock, data,
and maintenance & operation signals required by the extension cabinet are sent via
cables from the basic cabinet to the extension cabinet.
One basic cabinet, or 1 basic cabinet plus 1~2 extension cabinets, is called a cabinet
group.
Each cabinet group can support a maximum of 18 TRXs. When the number of TRXs
in a synchronous cell exceeds 18, multiple cabinet groups can be configured.
The cabinet group which provides the cell clock source is called the "basic cabinet
group". In the basic cabinet group, the basic cabinet has 2 TMU boards. Other
cabinet groups are called "extension cabinet groups" and 1 or 2 TMU boards can be
configured in the basic cabinet of each extension cabinet group.
6-1

User Manual
M900/M1800 Base Transceiver Station (BTS30)

System Description
Chapter 6 Configuration and Typical Application

Clock and maintenance operation signals are sent via cables from the basic cabinet
of the basic cabinet group to the basic cabinet of the extension cabinet group, and
then from the basic cabinet of each cabinet group to the extension cabinet of this
cabinet group.
Cabinet (group) configuration should observe the following rules:
When there are less than 6 TRXs in a synchronous cell, one cabinet is configured for
this cell. When there are over 6 but less than 18 TRXs in a synchronous cell,
combined cabinets are configured for this cell.
When there are over 18 TRXs in a synchronous cell, combined cabinet groups are
configured for this cell.
Configuration of combined cabinets or cabinet groups should obey the following rules:
z

The minimum antenna rule, i.e., to use as few as possible antennas for cell
configuration.

The minimum cabinet rule, i.e., to use as few as possible cabinets for cell
configuration.

The complete synchronous sector rule, i.e., all TRXs of a synchronous sector are
configured in the same cabinet group.

The basic cabinet priority rule, i.e., TRXs are configured in the basic cabinet in
preference, and the number of TRXs in the basic cabinet is not less than that in
any extension cabinet.

6.1.2 Configuration of the Common Resource Frame


The common resource frame in the basic cabinet of the basic cabinet group contains
4 PSUs, 1 PMU, 2 TMUs, 1 TEUs and 1 TES. The common frame in the basic cabinet
of the extension cabinet group contains 4 PSUs, 1 PMU, 1 or 2 TMUs, 1 TEU and 1
TES.
In the common frame of the extension cabinet, only 4 PSUs and 1 PMU are
configured, TEU and TES are optional.
The full configuration of the common resource frame is shown in Figure 6-1.
P
S
U

P
S
U

P
S
U

P
S
U

P
M
U

T T T
M M E
U U S

T
E
U

Figure 6-1 The common frame in full configuration

6-2

User Manual
M900/M1800 Base Transceiver Station (BTS30)

System Description
Chapter 6 Configuration and Typical Application

6.1.3 Configuration of the TRX Frame


A TRX frame has 6 TRX positions. When TRX units in a single cabinet are less than 6,
the carriers are arranged from left to right. The TRX frame in full configuration is
shown in Figure 6-2.
T
R
X

T
R
X

T
R
X

T
R
X

T
R
X

T
R
X

Figure 6-2 TRX frame in full configuration with TRX


When the much coverage is needed, the PBUs can be configured in the frame. The
TRX frame in full configuration with TRX and PBU is shown in Figure 6-3.
P
B
U

T
R
X

P
B
U

T
R
X

P
B
U

T
R
X

Figure 6-3 TRX frame in full configuration with TRX and PBU

6.1.4 Full Configuration of CDU Frame


The BTS30 cabinet has 3 slots for CDUs, so in the full configuration 3 CDUs can be
used. Single CDU is required for 1 to 2 carriers, two CDUs for 3 to 4 carriers, and
three CDUs are required for 5 to 6 carriers configuration, as shown in Figure 6-4.
In some configurations, SCU might be used.
C
D
U

C
D
U

C
D
U

Figure 6-4 Front view of CDU frame configuration


EDU and SCU might be used in some configurations. Configuring an EDU may
reduce the combining loss of RF signals and enhance the coverage of the base
station. In the case of hot spot coverage, configuring an SCU may reduce the number
of CDUs needed and thus lower the costs.

6-3

User Manual
M900/M1800 Base Transceiver Station (BTS30)

System Description
Chapter 6 Configuration and Typical Application

6.1.5 Configuration of the Antenna


I. Antenna
Each site can be configured with one omni cell or multiple directional cells (sectors).
When each cell has no more than 4 TRXs, two sets of antennas are used, one
antenna is used as diversity antenna. When the carriers in a cell are more than 4, one
more antenna is needed. The dual polarization antennas can also be used to reduce
the total number of antennas.

II. RF cable set


RF cable set refers to the RF cables from the combiner and divider unit to the top of
the cabinet and to TRX or PBU. From the combiner and divider unit to the top of the
cabinet, 1/4-inch super-flexible cables are used. While the receiving and transmitting
cables from the combiner and divider unit to TRX or PBU are all half-flexible cables.
The number of cables is usually related with TRX configuration.

6.2 Typical Configuration


This section discusses some typical configurations, including S (2) (one sector-cell,
configured with 2 TRXs), S (2/2/2) (three sector-cell, each cell configured with 2
TRXs), O (3) (one omni cell, configured with 3 TRXs), and O (4).

6.2.1 S(2) Configuration


I. Configuration of antenna components
Antennas
Each sector is configured with 2 sets of single polarization antennas. Or, each sector
is configured with one set of dual polarization antenna.
RF cable set
The BTS30 S (2) configuration cables are used.

II. Cabinet configuration


Only one cabinet is needed for S (2) configuration, as shown in Figure 6-5.

6-4

User Manual
M900/M1800 Base Transceiver Station (BTS30)

System Description
Chapter 6 Configuration and Typical Application

TDU

SWITCH BOX

E
D
U

FAN BOX

TTT T

M ME E

UUS U

AIR BOX

Note: Boards with slashes in the diagram are optional.

Figure 6-5 S(2) cabinet configuration

6.2.2 S(2/2/2) Configuration


I. Configuration of antenna components
Antennas
Each cell is configured with 2 sets of single polarization antennas, So in total 6
antennas are needed for 3 cells. Or, each cell is configured with one set of dual
polarization antenna, and 3 antennas are needed for 3 cells.

6-5

User Manual
M900/M1800 Base Transceiver Station (BTS30)

System Description
Chapter 6 Configuration and Typical Application

RF cable set
The BTS30 S (2/2/2) configuration cables are used.

II. Cabinet configuration


Only one cabinet is needed for S (2/2/2) configuration, as shown in Figure 6-6.
TDU

SWITCH BOX

FAN BOX

P P

TTT T

S M

M ME E

U U

UUS U

AIR BOX

Note: Boards with slashes in the diagram are optional.

Figure 6-6 S(2/2/2) cabinet configuration

6-6

User Manual
M900/M1800 Base Transceiver Station (BTS30)

System Description
Chapter 6 Configuration and Typical Application

6.2.3 O (3) Configuration


I. Configuration of antenna components
Antenna
The cell is configured with one set of omni antenna.
RF cable set
The BTS30 O (3) configuration cables are used.

II. Cabinet configuration


The cabinet configuration is shown in Figure 6-7.
TDU

SWITCH BOX

FAN BOX

T TT T

M ME E

U US U

AIR BOX

Note: Boards with slashes in the diagram are optional.

Figure 6-7 O(3) cabinet configuration

6-7

User Manual
M900/M1800 Base Transceiver Station (BTS30)

System Description
Chapter 6 Configuration and Typical Application

6.2.4 O(4) Configuration


I. Configuration of antenna components
Antenna
The cell is configured with one set of omni antenna.
RF cable set
The BTS30 O(4) configuration cables are used.

II. Cabinet configuration


The cabinet configuration is shown in Figure 6-8.
TDU

TDU

SWITCH BOX

FAN BOX

FAN BOX

P P

TTT T

P P

TTT T

S M

M ME E

S M

M ME E

U U

UUS U

U U

UUS U

AIR BOX

AIR BOX

Note: Boards with slashes in the diagram are optional.

Figure 6-8 O(4) cabinet configuration

6-8

User Manual
M900/M1800 Base Transceiver Station (BTS30)

System Description
Appendix A Abbreviations

Appendix A Abbreviations
A
AB

Access Burst

ACCH

Associated Control CHannel

ACU

Alternating Current Unit

AGCH

Access Grant CHannel

AI

Action Indicator

ARFCN

Absolute Radio Frequency Channel Number

B
BA

BCCH Allocation

BCC

Base Transceiver Station (BTS) Color Code

BCCH

Broadcast Control CHannel

BER

Bit Error Ratio

BFI

Bad Frame Indication

Bm

Full-rate traffic channel

BP

Burst Period

BSC

Base Station Controller

BSIC

Base transceiver Station Identity Code

BSS

Base Station Sub-System

BSSAP

Base Station Sub-System Application Part

BSSMAP

Base Station Sub-System Management Application Part

BSSOMAP

Base Station Sub-System Operation and Maintenance Application Part

BTS

Base Transceiver Station

BTSM

BTS Management

C
CA

Cell Allocation

CBCH

Cell Broadcast CHannel

CC

Call Control

CCCH

Common Control CHannel

CCH

Control CHannel

CDU

Combiner and Divider Unit

A-1

User Manual
M900/M1800 Base Transceiver Station (BTS30)

System Description
Appendix A Abbreviations

CM

Connection Management

CMB

Common resource Backplane

C/R

Command/Response field bit

CRC

Cyclic Redundancy Check (3 bit)

CUI

Carrier Unit Interface Controller

D
DB

Dummy Burst

DCCH

Dedicated Control CHannel

DCL

Diagnostic Control Link

DCU

Direct Current Unit

DL

Data Link (layer)

DLCI

Data Link Connection Identifier

Dm

Control channel

DRX

Discontinuous reception (mechanism)

DTAP

Direct Transfer Application Part

DTX

Discontinuous transmission (mechanism)

E
EAC

External Alarm Collection

ETS

European Telecommunication Standard

ETSI

European Telecommunications Standards Institute

F
FACCH

Fast ACCH

FACCH/F

Fast Associated Control Channel/Full rate

FB

Frequency correction Burst

FCCH

Frequency Correction CHannel

FCS

Frame Check Sequence

FH

Frequency Hopping

FN

Frame Number

FU

Frame Unit

G
GMSC

Gateway Mobile-services Switching Centre

GMSK

Gaussian Minimum Shift Keying (modulation)

GSM

Global System for Mobile communications

A-2

User Manual
M900/M1800 Base Transceiver Station (BTS30)

System Description
Appendix A Abbreviations

HDLC

High level Data Link Control

HLR

Home Location Register

HPA

High magnification Power Amplifier board

HSN

Hopping Sequence Number

I
ID

Identification/IDentity

IE

Signalling information element

IF

Information Frame

IMEI

International Mobile station Equipment Identity

IMSI

International Mobile Subscriber Identity

ISDN

Integrated Services Digital Network

ISUP

ISDN User Part (of signalling system No.7)

IWF

Interworking Function

L
L1

Layer 1

L2

Layer 2

L2ML

Layer 2 Management Link

L3

Layer 3

LA

Location Area

LAPB

Link Access Protocol Balanced

LAPD

Link Access Protocol on the D channel

LAPDm

Link Access Protocol on the Dm channel

Lm

Half rate traffic channel

M
MA

Mobile Allocation

MACN

Mobile Allocation Channel Number

MAI

Mobile Allocation Index

MAIO

Mobile Allocation Index Offset

MAP

Mobile Application Part

MCK

Main Clock board

MM

Mobility Management

MMI

Man-Machine Interface

MPH

Management entity - Physical layer [primitive]

MS

Mobile Station

A-3

User Manual
M900/M1800 Base Transceiver Station (BTS30)

System Description
Appendix A Abbreviations

MSC

Mobile-services Switching Centre, Mobile Switching Centre

MSISDN

Mobile Station International ISDN Number

MTP

Message Transfer Part

N
NB

Normal Burst

NM

Network Management

O
OCXO

Oven voltage Control Oscillator

O&M, OM

Operations & Maintenance

OMC

Operations & Maintenance Centre

OML

Operations & Maintenance Link

OSI

Open System Interconnection

OSI RM

OSI Reference Model

P
PAD

Packet Assembly/Disassembly facility

PAU

Power Amplifier Unit

PCH

Paging CHannel

PCM

Pulse Code Modulation

PH

Physical (layer)

PLMN

Public Land Mobile Network

PMU

Power Monitor Unit (board)

PP

Point-to-Point

PSTN

Public Switched Telephone Network

PSU

Power Supply Unit

R
RACH

Random Access CHannel

RBER

Residual Bit Error Ratio

RCU

Receiver Unit

RFN

Reduced TDMA Frame Number

RIL3

Radio Interface Layer 3

RNTABLE

Table of 128 integers in the hopping sequence

RPU

Radio frequency Process Unit

RR

Radio Resource management

RSL

Radio Signalling Link

A-4

User Manual
M900/M1800 Base Transceiver Station (BTS30)

System Description
Appendix A Abbreviations

RSM(RR')

Radio Sub-system Management

RXLEV

Received signal level

RXQUAL

Received Signal Quality

S
SABM

Set Asynchronous Balanced Mode

SACCH

Slow Associated Control CHannel

SACCH/C4

Slow Associated Control CHannel/SDCCH/4

SACCH/C8

Slow Associated Control CHannel/SDCCH/8

SACCH/T

Slow Associated Control CHannel/Traffic channel

SACCH/TF

Slow Associated Control CHannel/Traffic channel Full rate

SAP

Service Access Point

SAPI

Service Access Point Indicator

SB

Synchronization Burst

SCCP

Signalling Connection Control Part

SCH

Synchronization CHannel

SCN

Sub-Channel Number

SCU

Simple combining Unit

SDCCH

Stand-alone Dedicated Control CHannel

SFH

Slow Frequency Hopping

SID

Silence Descriptor

SIM

Subscriber Identity Module

SMS

Short Message Service

SMSCB

Short Message Service Cell Broadcast

SS

Supplementary Service

STU

Site Test Unit (board)

T
TA

Timing Advance

TBU

Transceiver Baseband Unit

TC

Transcoder

TCH

Traffic CHannel

TCH/F

A full rate TCH

TCH/F2.4

A full rate data TCH (2.4kbit/s)

TCH/F4.8

A full rate date TCH (4.8kbit/s)

TCH/F9.6

A full rate data TCH (9.6kbit/s)

A-5

User Manual
M900/M1800 Base Transceiver Station (BTS30)

System Description
Appendix A Abbreviations

TCH/FS

A full rate Speech TCH

TDMA

Time Division Multiple Access

TDP

Transmitter Driver and PLL

TEI

Terminal Equipment Identifier

TES

Transmission Extension power Supply unit

TEU

Transmission Extension Unit

TDU

Timing Distribution Unit

TI

Transaction Identifier

TMSI

Temporary Mobile Subscriber Identity

TMU

Timing/Transmission and Management Unit

TN

Timeslot Number

TRAU

Transcoder & Rate Adaptor Unit

TRB

Transceiver Backplane

TRX

Transceiver

TS

Time Slot
Technical Specification

TSC

Training Sequence Code

U
UI

Unnumbered Information (frame)

V
VAD

Voice Activity Detection

VLR

Visitor Location Register

Z
ZCS

Zero Current Switch

ZVS

Zero Voltage Switch

A-6

HUAWEI

M900/M1800 Base Transceiver Station (BTS30)


User Manual

Part 2 BTS Maintenance Terminal


System

User Manual
M900/M1800 Base Transceiver Station (BTS30)

BTS Maintenance Terminal System


Table of Contents

Table of Contents
Chapter 1 Overview ....................................................................................................................... 1-1
1.1 Brief Introduction to BTS Terminal Maintenance............................................................... 1-1
1.1.1 BTS Logic Objects .................................................................................................. 1-1
1.1.2 Status of BTS Logic Objects ................................................................................... 1-1
1.2 Brief Introduction to BTS Terminal Maintenance Operations ............................................ 1-2
1.2.1 User Login ............................................................................................................... 1-2
1.2.2 Interface Operation ................................................................................................. 1-3
Chapter 2 Site Maintenance ......................................................................................................... 2-1
2.1 Overview ............................................................................................................................ 2-1
2.2 Site Administrationship ...................................................................................................... 2-1
2.3 Start Site Operation ........................................................................................................... 2-3
2.4 View Resource................................................................................................................... 2-4
2.5 Force Load SW .................................................................................................................. 2-5
2.6 SW Activate ....................................................................................................................... 2-6
2.7 Site Hierarchical Reset ...................................................................................................... 2-8
2.8 Site Test............................................................................................................................. 2-9
2.9 Site Environment Monitoring............................................................................................ 2-10
Chapter 3 Cell Maintenance ......................................................................................................... 3-1
3.1 Overview ............................................................................................................................ 3-1
3.2 Cell Attributes Management .............................................................................................. 3-1
3.3 Cell OpStart ....................................................................................................................... 3-5
3.4 Change Cell Administrative State ...................................................................................... 3-5
3.5 Cell Performance Test ....................................................................................................... 3-6
Chapter 4 BT Maintenance ........................................................................................................... 4-1
4.1 Overview ............................................................................................................................ 4-1
4.2 OpStart BT ......................................................................................................................... 4-1
4.3 Change BT Administrative State........................................................................................ 4-2
4.4 BT Reinitialization .............................................................................................................. 4-3
4.5 BT Test .............................................................................................................................. 4-4
Chapter 5 Channel Maintenance.................................................................................................. 5-1
5.1 Overview ............................................................................................................................ 5-1
5.2 Channel Attributes Management ....................................................................................... 5-1
5.3 OpStart Channel ................................................................................................................ 5-3
5.4 Change Channel Administrative State............................................................................... 5-3
5.5 Loop Test ........................................................................................................................... 5-4

User Manual
M900/M1800 Base Transceiver Station (BTS30)

BTS Maintenance Terminal System


Table of Contents

Chapter 6 RC Maintenance........................................................................................................... 6-1


6.1 Overview ............................................................................................................................ 6-1
6.2 RC Attributes Management ............................................................................................... 6-1
6.3 OpStart RC ........................................................................................................................ 6-2
6.4 Change RC Administrative State ....................................................................................... 6-3
6.5 RC Reinitialization.............................................................................................................. 6-4
Chapter 7 Board Maintenance...................................................................................................... 7-1
7.1 Overview ............................................................................................................................ 7-1
7.1.1 Board Maintenance Function .................................................................................. 7-1
7.1.2 Board Maintenance Operations .............................................................................. 7-2
7.2 Board Reset ....................................................................................................................... 7-4
7.3 OpStart Board .................................................................................................................... 7-5
7.4 Board Self-test ................................................................................................................... 7-5
7.5 Change Board Administrative State................................................................................... 7-6
7.6 Board Information .............................................................................................................. 7-7
7.7 Loop Test ........................................................................................................................... 7-7
7.8 Board Alarm ....................................................................................................................... 7-8
7.9 MCK Clock Operation ........................................................................................................ 7-9
7.10 Set MDC Parameters..................................................................................................... 7-10
7.11 CDU Operation .............................................................................................................. 7-11

ii

User Manual
M900/M1800 Base Transceiver Station (BTS30)

BTS Maintenance Terminal System


Chapter 1 Overview

Chapter 1 Overview
1.1 Brief Introduction to BTS Terminal Maintenance
In BTS terminal maintenance, the PC (desktop or laptop, but usually the latter) that is
installed with BTS terminal maintenance software is connected by serial
communication cables to the TMU, the operation and maintenance unit of the BTS
(which bears a 9-pin serial communication cable port and a network port).
BTS terminal maintenance is carried out according to BTS logic objects.
The logic objects of a BTS are introduced below.

1.1.1 BTS Logic Objects


In BTS terminal maintenance, the logic objects include: Site, Cell, BT (Baseband
Transceiver), CH (Channel), RC (Radio Carrier) and Board, as shown in Figure 1-1
below:
Site
Cell-0

Cell-1

BT-0

BT-1 BT-n

CH-0

CH-1

Cell-m

RC-0

RC-n

CH-7

Figure 1-1 Logic objects of a BTS

1.1.2 Status of BTS Logic Objects


I. Management status
The management status of a BTS logic object is set by BTS system administrator. It
indicates whether a logic object is available or not.
The management status of a BTS logic object includes:

1-1

User Manual
M900/M1800 Base Transceiver Station (BTS30)
z

BTS Maintenance Terminal System


Chapter 1 Overview

Locked: Transceiving with the radio interface and/or the terrestrial baseband
disabled.

Unlocked: Transceiving with the radio interface and/or the terrestrial baseband
enabled.

ShutDown: The ongoing service provided involving this logic object will be
maintained till release, but no new users are allowed access to this object.

Note:

A cell does not have the management status of ShutDown.


The management status of a site determines whether a particular operator needs to obtain site
administrationship before he is able to set BTS parameters.

II. Operational status


The operational status of a BTS logic object indicates whether the object is in normal
operation.
The operation status of a BTS object includes:
z

Enabled

Disabled

1.2 Brief Introduction to BTS Terminal Maintenance


Operations
In BTS terminal maintenance, maintenance operations are carried out on a single
local PC. In this section, detailed description of operations carried out through the
BTS terminal maintenance console is provided.

1.2.1 User Login


I. Function
To log in as a user and activate the BTS terminal maintenance console.

II. Login
Click on the fifth button in the toolbar, or select [User/User Login] in the menu, and a
user login dialogue box will pop up. Input the user name and password in this
dialogue box, and click <OK>, as shown in Figure 1-2.

1-2

User Manual
M900/M1800 Base Transceiver Station (BTS30)

BTS Maintenance Terminal System


Chapter 1 Overview

If the login succeeds, this dialogue box closes automatically, and the maintenance
personnel are able to perform operations, while if the login fails, causes are
displayed.

Figure 1-2 User login

1.2.2 Interface Operation


The interface for the BTS terminal maintenance console is divided into several parts
such as menu, tool bar, BTS logic object, object function, alarm window, status bar,
etc., as shown in Figure 1-3.
Buttons in the toolbar are shortcuts for some commands. The function of this button
will be provided in the status bar when the cursor is stopped at this button.

1-3

User Manual
M900/M1800 Base Transceiver Station (BTS30)

BTS Maintenance Terminal System


Chapter 1 Overview

Figure 1-3 BTS terminal maintenance console


The bottom part of this interface (blue in Figure 1-3) is where BTS alarm information
is to be displayed.
Click on any piece of the alarm information displayed, and the detailed explanation of
the alarm will be provided in the popped up window (as shown in Figure 1-5).
Right click to activate the floating menu, as shown in Figure 1-4. Select from menu
items to set, save, clear the alarm information, or browse along the list of alarm
information.

1-4

User Manual
M900/M1800 Base Transceiver Station (BTS30)

BTS Maintenance Terminal System


Chapter 1 Overview

Figure 1-4 BTS terminal maintenance console alarm display

Figure 1-5 Operation on alarm information

1-5

User Manual
M900/M1800 Base Transceiver Station (BTS30)

BTS Maintenance Terminal System


Chapter 1 Overview

Figure 1-6 Detailed explanation of alarm information

1-6

User Manual
M900/M1800 Base Transceiver Station (BTS30)

BTS Maintenance Terminal System


Chapter 2 Site Maintenance

Chapter 2 Site Maintenance


2.1 Overview
There may be one or more cells at a site. The maintenance of the site involves the
maintenance over the entire BTS.
Figure 2-1 shows the interface [Site Maintenance Terminal System] in the BTS
maintenance console.
In the following sections, site maintenance functions are explained in detail.

Figure 2-1 The interface [Site Maintenance Terminal System]

2.2 Site Administrationship


I. Function
Site administrationship is the authority to set the various BTS parameters. BTS
parameters can be set either at the BSC or the local BTS maintenance terminal.
However, BTS parameter setting cannot be performed at the same time at both the

2-1

User Manual
M900/M1800 Base Transceiver Station (BTS30)

BTS Maintenance Terminal System


Chapter 2 Site Maintenance

BSC and the local BTS terminal. Therefore, site administrationship will be granted to
one side at a time.
When a site is installed and begins to run, BSC has the site administrationship by
default. Therefore the maintenance personnel need to obtain site administrationship
before performing any operation at a BTS terminal.
When the operation is over, please release the site administrationship.

II. Access
Activate

BTS

terminal

maintenance

console,

and

select

[Site/Site

Administrationship]. Click <Obtain> or <Release> in the popped up dialogue box to


obtain or release site administrationship, and the operational result will be displayed
in this box, as shown in Figure 2-2.

Figure 2-2 Site administrationship (obtain administrationship)


When the operation is over, the administrationship must be released. Otherwise,
maintenance personnel will be blocked from performing remote maintenance.
The interface of releasing the administrationship is shown in Figure 2-3.

2-2

User Manual
M900/M1800 Base Transceiver Station (BTS30)

BTS Maintenance Terminal System


Chapter 2 Site Maintenance

Figure 2-3 Release the administrationship

2.3 Start Site Operation


I. Function
To put the site data set in BTS operation and maintenance unit into effect and start
the service of the site.

II. Access
Activate BTS terminal maintenance console, and select [Site/Site OpStart]. Click
<OK> in the popped up message box [Start Site Operation]. The result of the
operation will be displayed in the status bar, as shown in Figure 2-4.

Figure 2-4 Start Site Operation

2-3

User Manual
M900/M1800 Base Transceiver Station (BTS30)

BTS Maintenance Terminal System


Chapter 2 Site Maintenance

2.4 View Resource


I. Function
The maintenance personnel can view the status of resource utilization in the terminal
maintenance system of the BTS, specifically, the utilization ratio of the CPU and the
RAM of TMU and TRX.

II. Access
Activate BTS terminal maintenance console, and select [Site/View Resource], and
the resource utilization status of the TRX and the TMU of the site will be displayed in
the popped-up window.
Select in [Resource Type] to determine the type of resource whose utilization status
is to be viewed. As is shown in Figure 2-5, Figure 2-6.

Figure 2-5 View the status of resource

2-4

User Manual
M900/M1800 Base Transceiver Station (BTS30)

BTS Maintenance Terminal System


Chapter 2 Site Maintenance

Figure 2-6 View CPU status

2.5 Force Load SW


I. Function
The BTS software can be upgraded from both the local and the remote terminal.
Software upgrading for TMU, TRX and PBU can therefore be easily achieved.

II. Access
Activate BTS terminal maintenance console, select [Site/Forced Load SW], and the
dialogue box [SW Download] will pop up.
Select in this dialogue box the name of the software and the type of the files to be
loaded, and click <Begin>.
The progress of software loading will be displayed at the maintenance console, as
shown in Figure 2-7.
When it is promoted that Software loading successful, click <Close> to complete the
forced software loading from the maintenance console to the BTS.

2-5

User Manual
M900/M1800 Base Transceiver Station (BTS30)

BTS Maintenance Terminal System


Chapter 2 Site Maintenance

Figure 2-7 The Dialogue Box [SW Download]

III. Interface description


For the description of the interface in Figure 2-7, please see Table 2-1 below.
Table 2-1 [SW Download]
Field
File Name

Description

Value range

Recommended value

The name of the file saved on the


maintenance console that is to be
loaded

The data for software loading is


Send
transferred with the window size as one 1~49
Window Size
unit

49

Version

Version number of the software to be


loaded

Must be the same as the version


number specified in the file to be
loaded, otherwise the loading will
fail.

File ID

For which type of board the software


upgrading is to be carried out

Must be the same as the type of


the file to be loaded.

2.6 SW Activate
I. Function
After the forced BTS software loading, activate the software. The software upgrading
task is not yet completed before the loaded software is activated.

2-6

User Manual
M900/M1800 Base Transceiver Station (BTS30)

BTS Maintenance Terminal System


Chapter 2 Site Maintenance

II. Access
Activate BTS terminal maintenance console, select [Site/SW Activate], and the
interface [SW Activate] (as shown in Figure 2-8 and Figure 2-9) will pop up. Input the
version of the software to be activated, select the corresponding board number and
file ID, and click <OK>. If the activation is successful, the prompt SW activation
request is confirmed will be displayed.

Figure 2-8 Activating the TMU board software

Figure 2-9 Activating the TRX board software

2-7

User Manual
M900/M1800 Base Transceiver Station (BTS30)

BTS Maintenance Terminal System


Chapter 2 Site Maintenance

III. Interface description


For the description of the software activation interface, see Table 2-2.
Table 2-2 The Interface [SW Activate]
Field

Meaning

Value range

Recommended value
Must be the same as the version
number of the software to be loaded,
otherwise the activation will fail.

Version

Version number of the


loaded software

Board No.

Format: 0, 1, 0-X,
Number of the specified
etc. (X being the
board that is to be
number of the TRXs
activated
configured)

File ID

Type of board for which


the software upgrading is
to be carried out

2.7 Site Hierarchical Reset


I. Function
Site resetting is performed as a remedy when a site is abnormal.
Resetting a site will stop the services of the cells for several minutes under this site.
Therefore, care should be taken with this function.

II. Access
Enter the maintenance console of the BTS, select [Site/Site Reset Hierarchically].
The interface [Site Hierarchical Reset] will pop up. Select the level of the resetting in
this interface, and click <OK>, as shown in Figure 2-10.

2-8

User Manual
M900/M1800 Base Transceiver Station (BTS30)

BTS Maintenance Terminal System


Chapter 2 Site Maintenance

Figure 2-10 The 'Site Hierarchical Reset' interface

III. Interface description


For description of the interface [Site Hierarchical Reset], see Table 2-3.
Table 2-3 Site resetting levels
Reset level
First Level Reset

Second Level Reset

Meaning
Currently not supported by the BTSs.
Please see the definition of this level of resetting on the interface.
Currently not supported by the BTSs.
Please see the definition of this level of resetting on the interface.
Please see the definition of this level of resetting on the interface.

Third Level Reset

Fourth Level Reset

In this level of resetting, the base station applies to BSC side for the re-sending
of data configuration.
Please see the definition of this level of resetting on the interface. In this level
of resetting, base station TMU hardware resetting is performed, and the base
station re-applies for BSC data configuration.

2.8 Site Test


I. Function
To test the functional boards configured for the site, and return the test results.

2-9

User Manual
M900/M1800 Base Transceiver Station (BTS30)

BTS Maintenance Terminal System


Chapter 2 Site Maintenance

II. Access
Activate BTS terminal maintenance console, and select [Site/Site Test]. The interface
[Site Test] will pop up. Click <Begin>, and the test results will be displayed in this
interface, as shown in Figure 2-11.

Figure 2-11 Site test results

2.9 Site Environment Monitoring


I. Function
To implement operations on the environment monitoring box such as resetting the
environment monitoring box, clearing the burglary alarm, setting the upper and lower
limits for humidity and temperature alarms, relay operation and disable the EAC
alarm.

Caution:
In this system, burglary alarm, fire alarm and smoke alarm are all reported as burglary alarm. Therefore,
the occurrence of any of them will trigger the burglary alarm.

II. Access
Activate BTS terminal maintenance console, and select [Site/Environment
Monitoring Setting]. The interface [Environment Monitoring Setting] will pop up,
as shown in Figure 2-12.

2-10

User Manual
M900/M1800 Base Transceiver Station (BTS30)

BTS Maintenance Terminal System


Chapter 2 Site Maintenance

Figure 2-12 Environment monitoring setup


Resetting of the environment monitoring instrument is performed when the equipment
is in abnormal service. Select Reset in [Select Operation Type]. Click <OK>, then
the resetting can be performed and the operational result will be displayed, as shown
in Figure 2-13.

Figure 2-13 Resetting operation


When the burglary alarm is confirmed or cleared, please clear the burglary alarm
record. Select Clear Burglary alarm in [Select Operation Type]. Click <OK>, and

2-11

User Manual
M900/M1800 Base Transceiver Station (BTS30)

BTS Maintenance Terminal System


Chapter 2 Site Maintenance

the burglary alarm record will be cleared, and the operational result will be displayed
in the status bar, as shown in Figure 2-14.

Figure 2-14 Clear burglary alarm


Conditions for the generation of environment alarms can be determined by the upper
and lower limits for temperature and humidity. Select Set Temperature and Humidity
in [Select Operation Type] and set the upper and lower limits for alarm generation in
[Temperature and Humidity]. Click <OK>. The operational result is displayed in the
status bar, as shown in Figure 2-15.

Figure 2-15 Set upper and lower limits for temperature and humidity

2-12

User Manual
M900/M1800 Base Transceiver Station (BTS30)

BTS Maintenance Terminal System


Chapter 2 Site Maintenance

With the implementation of relay operation, maintenance can startup and close some
relevant equipment. Select Relay Operation in [Select Operation Type], and set the
starting and closing of the relevant relays in Relay Operation. Click <OK> and the
operational result will be displayed, as shown in Figure 2-16.

Figure 2-16 Relay operation


Select Disable the EAC Alarm, and the alarm report will be shut down for 10 minutes.
This is performed by the maintenance personnel in equipment maintenance to
prevent the mis-generation of false alarms caused by their operations. Select Disable
the EAC Alarm in [Select Operation Type], and click <OK>. The operational result
will be displayed, as shown in Figure 2-17.

Figure 2-17 Disable the EAC alarm

2-13

User Manual
M900/M1800 Base Transceiver Station (BTS30)

BTS Maintenance Terminal System


Chapter 3 Cell Maintenance

Chapter 3 Cell Maintenance


3.1 Overview
A cell corresponds to an inseparable wireless service area and may include one or
more baseband transceivers and radio carrier units. A cell should have a BCCH to
broadcast cell information.
When it is necessary to carry out maintenance over a cell or over all the baseband
transceivers and radio carriers in a cell, perform cell maintenance to achieve this, as
shown in Figure 3-1.

Figure 3-1 Cell maintenance

3.2 Cell Attributes Management


I. Function
On-the-spot site maintenance and debugging operation often involve the setting of
various attribute parameters at a BTS terminal.

3-1

User Manual
M900/M1800 Base Transceiver Station (BTS30)

BTS Maintenance Terminal System


Chapter 3 Cell Maintenance

Cell attributes management involves the setting of cell attributes. With cell attributes
management, cell attributes can also be obtained.
The setting of the other attribute parameters will be described later in this module.

II. Access
Activate BTS maintenance console, and select [Cell/Cell Attributes Management].
The interface [Cell Attributes Management] will pop up. Input the proper values in
this interface, and click <Set>, as shown in Figure 3-2, Figure 3-3, and Figure 3-4.
Click <Refresh> to obtain the cell attributes.

Figure 3-2 Cell attributes management (a)

3-2

User Manual
M900/M1800 Base Transceiver Station (BTS30)

BTS Maintenance Terminal System


Chapter 3 Cell Maintenance

Figure 3-3 Cell attributes management (b)

Figure 3-4 Cell attributes management (c)

III. Interface description


For the description of the above interfaces, see Table 3-1.

3-3

User Manual
M900/M1800 Base Transceiver Station (BTS30)

BTS Maintenance Terminal System


Chapter 3 Cell Maintenance

Table 3-1 Cell attributes


Field

Description

There are six interference levels, therefore 6


parameters need to be configured. The BTS
calculates the interference level on the
Interference channel according to the MR (measurement
level boundary report) from the mobile station. After the
calculation is compared with the six levels, the
interference level of the channel can be
obtained.

Value range

Recommended
value

-115~85.
The six parameters
should be arranged in
ascending sequence.

Interference
average
parameter

The BTS calculates the level of interference


according to the reports received from the
mobile station. This parameter determines the 0 ~255
number of reports a BTS receives before it
makes such a calculation

15

Connection
failure
threshold

BTS makes comparisons the report from the


mobile station and the error rate with the level, 0 ~16
and determine if the connection fails.

14

T200

The timer interval for waiting for response


when there is no response after a message is
transferred.

Max time
advanced

The farthermost timing advance in the


coverage area of a cell.

Overload
period

A span in time that serves as an interval for


the BTS to calculate the occupation rate of the 0 ~255
channel.

CCCH load
threshold

Ratio between the number of successful


random accesses in a time unit and the
number of collisions during this time unit.

CCCH load
indication
period

The interval a which the BTS reports to the


network side if CCCH is overloaded.

RACH busy
threshold

The level of the random access threshold.

0 ~63

0 ~100%

63

80%

15s

-110 ~145 dBm

The range is
decided by the
operator

RACH load
The random access channel load average
averaging slots timeslots on RACH.
Cell air timer

The timing period of the timer.

NY1

Maximum number of physical information


retransmissions. (Relevant to handover).

There are 124 and 374 frequencies


respectively in the M900 system and M1800
BCCH ARFCN
system. This field means the number of the
frequency of BCCH.

3-4

Usually 6 and 4

User Manual
M900/M1800 Base Transceiver Station (BTS30)

Field
BSIC

BTS Maintenance Terminal System


Chapter 3 Cell Maintenance

Description

Value range

Recommended
value

BTS color code. BSIC equals the sum of the


network color code and the cell color code.

No. of the frame that the setting in this


Starting frame interface to be valid for. If the settings are
No.
desired to take effect right away, this
parameter should be 65535.

0 ~ 42432, 65535

65535

3.3 Cell OpStart


I. Function
To put the site data set at the BTS operation and maintenance terminal into effect and
put the cell into service.

II. Access
Activate BTS maintenance console, and select [Cell/Cell OpStart]. The interface
[Start Cell Operation] will pop up. Click <OK>, and the operational result will be
displayed in the status bar, as shown in Figure 3-5.

Figure 3-5 Cell OpStart

3.4 Change Cell Administrative State


I. Function
In some cases the cell administrative state needs to be changed. This can be
achieved through the BTS terminal.

3-5

User Manual
M900/M1800 Base Transceiver Station (BTS30)

BTS Maintenance Terminal System


Chapter 3 Cell Maintenance

The cell administrative state can be set to Locked or Unlocked. However, please
note that when the administrative state is successfully set to Locked, all the channels
in the cell are in Out of Service state, which means the cell is not in service and the
MSs in this service area can not access the network or make/answer any call.
Therefore, care should be taken with this function.

II. Access
Activate BTS maintenance console, and select [Cell/Change Administrative State].
The interface [Change Cell Administrative State] will pop up. Select the
administrative state to be changed into and click <OK>, as shown in Figure 3-6.

Figure 3-6 Change cell administrative state

3.5 Cell Performance Test


I. Function
To check all basebands and RCs in the cell to see if they are working normally.

II. Access
Activate BTS maintenance console, and select [Cell/Cell Test]. Click <Begin> in the
popped up interface, and the test result will be displayed in this interface, as shown in
Figure 3-7.

3-6

User Manual
M900/M1800 Base Transceiver Station (BTS30)

BTS Maintenance Terminal System


Chapter 3 Cell Maintenance

Figure 3-7 Cell performance test

3-7

User Manual
M900/M1800 Base Transceiver Station (BTS30)

BTS Maintenance Terminal System


Chapter 4 BT Maintenance

Chapter 4 BT Maintenance
4.1 Overview
Baseband Transceiver (BT) is a function entity involved in baseband processing. It
corresponds to the 8 timeslots at the radio interface. The BTS terminal maintenance
over the BT logic objects is shown in Figure 4-1.

Figure 4-1 BT maintenance

4.2 OpStart BT
I. Function
To enable the data set at the BT and put the BT into service through BTS terminal
maintenance.

4-1

User Manual
M900/M1800 Base Transceiver Station (BTS30)

BTS Maintenance Terminal System


Chapter 4 BT Maintenance

II. Access
Activate BTS maintenance console, select [BT/BT OpStart] and click <OK> on the
pop-up interface, and the operational result will be displayed in this interface, as
shown in Figure 4-2.

Figure 4-2 BT OpStart

4.3 Change BT Administrative State


I. Function
The administrative state of BT can be changed according to operations at the
maintenance console. However, please note that changing the BT administrative
state into Locked or ShutDown will affect service provision. Therefore, care should
be taken with this function.

II. Access
Activate BTS maintenance console, and select [BT/Change BT Administrative
State]. Select the BT whose administrative state needs to be changed in the pop-up
interface and select the administrative state to be changed into, then click <OK>. The
operational result will be displayed in the right half of this interface, as shown in
Figure 4-3.

4-2

User Manual
M900/M1800 Base Transceiver Station (BTS30)

BTS Maintenance Terminal System


Chapter 4 BT Maintenance

Figure 4-3 Change BT administrative state

4.4 BT Reinitialization
I. Function
To reset the hardware of the BT. This will disconnect the users from the BT. Therefore,
care should be taken with this function.

II. Access
Activate BTS maintenance console, select [BT/BT Reinitialization], and click <OK>
in the pop-up interface, and the operational result will be displayed in the interface, as
shown in Figure 4-4.

Figure 4-4 BT reinitialization

4-3

User Manual
M900/M1800 Base Transceiver Station (BTS30)

BTS Maintenance Terminal System


Chapter 4 BT Maintenance

4.5 BT Test
I. Function
BT test includes:
z

BIU loop test

TRX self-test

The BIU loop test involves the testing of physical links between the Abis signaling
channel of the BSC and the baseband part of the TRX. On receiving the command,
BT board performs the test, and reports the test result. The operation personnel can
judge if the Abis link of the current BT board is normal according to the reported
results.
In the TRX self-test, self-test is performed over the TRX and the test results are
returned.

II. Access
Activate BTS maintenance console, select [BT/BT Test]. Select test items in the
pop-up interface (e.g., BIU loop test /TRX self-test), set Test time and click <Begin>
to start the test. When the test is over, the result will be displayed in this interface, as
shown in Figure 4-5 and Figure 4-6.

Figure 4-5 BIU loop test

4-4

User Manual
M900/M1800 Base Transceiver Station (BTS30)

BTS Maintenance Terminal System


Chapter 4 BT Maintenance

Figure 4-6 TRX self-test

4-5

User Manual
M900/M1800 Base Transceiver Station (BTS30)

BTS Maintenance Terminal System


Chapter 5 Channel Maintenance

Chapter 5 Channel Maintenance


5.1 Overview
A channel is a transceiving entity of a timeslot at the radio interface.
A physical channel is determined by its corresponding timeslot and frequency
parameters, and may correspond to several logic channels due to different
combinations of channels.
Maintenance over the channel is shown in Figure 5-1.

Figure 5-1 Channel maintenance

5.2 Channel Attributes Management


I. Function
To set the attributes of BTS channel on the BTS site. With channel attributes
management, channel attributes can be obtained.

5-1

User Manual
M900/M1800 Base Transceiver Station (BTS30)

BTS Maintenance Terminal System


Chapter 5 Channel Maintenance

II. Access
Activate BTS maintenance console, and select [Channel/Channel Attributes
Management]. Input appropriate parameters, and click <Set>. The result of the
setting will be displayed on the status bar in the window, as shown in Figure 5-2. Click
<Refresh> to obtain the channel attributes.

Figure 5-2 Channel attributes management

III. Interface description


For the description of the above interface, see Table 5-1.

Note:
The configuration of channel parameters must be the same as that at the BSC side, otherwise the
system will not be able to operate normally.

Table 5-1 Description of the interface [Channel Attributes Management]


Channel
attribute

Description

Value range

Channel
combination

Combination of logic channels carried by the


physical channel

See the pulldown


list

TSC selection

The demodulation part of BT is used to calculate


channel features for correct decoding of valid
information.

0~7

5-2

Recommende
d value

User Manual
M900/M1800 Base Transceiver Station (BTS30)

Channel
attribute
Starting frame
No.

BTS Maintenance Terminal System


Chapter 5 Channel Maintenance

Description

Value range

No. of the frame that the setting in this interface to


0 ~ 42432,
be valid for. If the settings are desired to take effect
65535
right away, this parameter should be 65535.

Recommende
d value
65535

5.3 OpStart Channel


I. Function
To validate the data setting of the channel.

II. Access
Activate BTS maintenance console, and select [Channel/OpStart Channel]. Click
<OK> in the pop-up interface, and the operational result will be displayed in the status
bar, as shown in Figure 5-3.

Figure 5-3 OpStart channel

5.4 Change Channel Administrative State


I. Function
The administrative state of the channels can be changed by operations at the
maintenance console.
However, please note that changing the BT administrative state into 'LOCKED' will
affect service provision. Therefore, care should be taken with this function.

5-3

User Manual
M900/M1800 Base Transceiver Station (BTS30)

BTS Maintenance Terminal System


Chapter 5 Channel Maintenance

II. Access
Activate BTS maintenance console, and select [Channel/Change Administrative
State]. Select the channel whose administrative state is to be changed, and click
<OK>. The operational result will be displayed in the sub-window on the right of this
interface, as shown in Figure 5-4 and Figure 5-5.

Figure 5-4 Channel in 'Locked' state

Figure 5-5 Channel in 'Unlocked' state

5.5 Loop Test


I. Function
Channel loop test involves the testing of BT parameters such as channel error rate
and transmitted power for the purpose of getting a better idea of the quality of the
channel.

5-4

User Manual
M900/M1800 Base Transceiver Station (BTS30)

BTS Maintenance Terminal System


Chapter 5 Channel Maintenance

Currently, BTS30 supports:


z

TRX RF self-loop test

BIU loop test

In the TRX RF self-loop test, mainly the performance of the RF unit is tested. After the
TMU issues a test command, the TRX transfers data to the RF unit on a traffic
channel, and the data loops back from the RF unit so that the TRX can receive the
traffic channel data sent by itself. After comparing the received data with the copy of it
that was sent earlier, the TRX report the error rate and thus determines the link
quality of the current RF unit.
The BIU loop test mainly involves the testing of the connection state between the
TMU and the TRX. The data sent from the TRX loops back from the TMU. After
comparison, the error rate will be calculated so as to judge if the connection between
TMU and TRX is normal.

II. Access
Activate BTS maintenance console, and select [Channel/Loop Test]. Select
appropriate test items in the pop-up interface, set the test time and the power level for
the TRX RF self-test. Click <OK> to start the test. For illustration of the TRX FR
self-loop test and the BIU loop test, see Figure 5-6 and Figure 5-7 below.

Figure 5-6 Result of BIU loop test

5-5

User Manual
M900/M1800 Base Transceiver Station (BTS30)

BTS Maintenance Terminal System


Chapter 5 Channel Maintenance

Figure 5-7 Result of TRX RF self-loop test

5-6

User Manual
M900/M1800 Base Transceiver Station (BTS30)

BTS Maintenance Terminal System


Chapter 6 RC Maintenance

Chapter 6 RC Maintenance
6.1 Overview
The radio carrier (RC) is a transceiving entity corresponding to the eight timeslots at
the radio interface. Operation and maintenance to the RC will be introduced in detail
in the following sections.

Figure 6-1 RC maintenance

6.2 RC Attributes Management


I. Function
RC attributes management involves the setting of RC attributes during BTS site
maintenance and commissioning.
With this function, the RC attributes can be obtained.

6-1

User Manual
M900/M1800 Base Transceiver Station (BTS30)

BTS Maintenance Terminal System


Chapter 6 RC Maintenance

II. Access
Activate BTS maintenance console, and select [RC/RC Attributes Management].
Input RC attributes in the pop-up interface, and click <Set>.The operational result will
be displayed in the status bar in the window, as shown in Figure 6-2. Click <Refresh>
to obtain the RC attributes.

Figure 6-2 RC attributes management

III. Interface description


For the description of the above interface, see Table 6-1.
Table 6-1 Description of the interface [RC Attributes Administration]
RC attribute

Meaning

RF Max power
reduction

The maximum value of power reduction. When the power reduction value exceeds
this value, it can not be reduced any further.

ARFCN

In the M900/M1800 systems, there are 124 (numbered 0 ~ 123) and 374
(numbered 512 ~ 885) frequencies respectively. ARFCN refers to the frequency
number of this RC. The value of the 900MHz RCs ranges 0 ~ 124, and that of
1800MHz RCs 512 ~ 885.

6.3 OpStart RC
I. Function
To put the set RC data (RC attributes and RC extended attributes) into effect.

6-2

User Manual
M900/M1800 Base Transceiver Station (BTS30)

BTS Maintenance Terminal System


Chapter 6 RC Maintenance

II. Access
Activate BTS maintenance console, and select [RC/RC OpStart]. Click <OK>, and
the operational result will be displayed in the pop-up interface [Start RC Operation],
as shown in Figure 6-3.

Figure 6-3 Opstart RC

6.4 Change RC Administrative State


I. Function
The administrative state of an RC can be changed by operations at the maintenance
console.
However, please note that changing the RC administrative state into 'LOCKED' will
affect service provision. Therefore, care should be taken with this function.

II. Access
Activate BTS maintenance console, and select [RC/Change Administrative State].
In the pop-up interface, select the BT whose administrative state is to be changed
and the target administrative state, and click <OK>. The operational result will be
displayed in the sub-window on the right of this interface, as shown in Figure 6-4 and
Figure 6-5.

6-3

User Manual
M900/M1800 Base Transceiver Station (BTS30)

BTS Maintenance Terminal System


Chapter 6 RC Maintenance

Figure 6-4 RC in the 'LOCKED' state

Figure 6-5 RC in 'UNLOCKED' state

6.5 RC Reinitialization
I. Function
This is the reconfiguration of TRX data and the resetting of TRX. RC resetting will
lead to the disconnection of users of the corresponding BT. Therefore, care should be
taken with this function.

II. Access
Activate BTS maintenance console, and select [RC/RC Reinitialization]. Click <OK>
in the pop-up window, and the operational result will be shown in this interface, as
shown in Figure 6-6.

6-4

User Manual
M900/M1800 Base Transceiver Station (BTS30)

BTS Maintenance Terminal System


Chapter 6 RC Maintenance

Figure 6-6 RC reinitialization

6-5

User Manual
M900/M1800 Base Transceiver Station (BTS30)

BTS Maintenance Terminal System


Chapter 7 Board Maintenance

Chapter 7 Board Maintenance


7.1 Overview
7.1.1 Board Maintenance Function
Visual and direct maintenance is achieved with the BTS terminal maintenance
console. Double click on [Board/BoardAdm] in the maintenance console, and the
interface for board maintenance will pop up, as shown in Figure 7-1.
Hardware configurations (as in the Slot Description table) set by the BSC for a site
are displayed in this interface, and the No., name and status of the boards can be
obtained from the display.
Operations can be performed in this interface. Select and right click on the icon of the
board to be operated on, and execute the menu command you desire from the
floating menu that pops up. Note that different maintenance commands apply to
different boards.

Figure 7-1 Board operation

7-1

User Manual
M900/M1800 Base Transceiver Station (BTS30)

BTS Maintenance Terminal System


Chapter 7 Board Maintenance

7.1.2 Board Maintenance Operations


There are unified operation procedures for board maintenance: 1) Activate board
maintenance interface. 2) Right click on the icon of the board to be operated on. 3)
Select the corresponding function in the pop-up menu.
z

The TRX maintenance menu is as shown in Figure 7-2.

The TMU maintenance menu is as shown in Figure 7-3.

The CDU maintenance menu is as shown in Figure 7-4.

The PMB maintenance menu is as shown in Figure 7-5.

Figure 7-2 TRX maintenance menu

7-2

User Manual
M900/M1800 Base Transceiver Station (BTS30)

BTS Maintenance Terminal System


Chapter 7 Board Maintenance

Figure 7-3 TMU maintenance menu

Figure 7-4 CDU maintenance menu

7-3

User Manual
M900/M1800 Base Transceiver Station (BTS30)

BTS Maintenance Terminal System


Chapter 7 Board Maintenance

Figure 7-5 PMB maintenance menu

7.2 Board Reset


I. Function
To reset boards, i.e., to reinitialize the corresponding boards.
Please note that the resetting of a board may affect the sessions of the subscribers.
Therefore, care should be taken with this function.

II. Access
Select [Reset] in the board operation menu, and the result will be displayed in the
pop-up interface, as shown in Figure 7-6.

Figure 7-6 Board reset

7-4

User Manual
M900/M1800 Base Transceiver Station (BTS30)

BTS Maintenance Terminal System


Chapter 7 Board Maintenance

7.3 OpStart Board


I. Function
To put the data configurations of the objects into effect.

II. Access
Select [OpStart] in the board operation menu, and the operational results will be
displayed in the pop-up interface, as shown in Figure 7-7.

Figure 7-7 OpStart Board

7.4 Board Self-test


I. Function
The board tests by itself if the board software is running normally.

II. Access
Select [Test] in the operation menu, and the test results will be displayed in the
pop-up interface, as shown in Figure 7-8.

Figure 7-8 Board self-test

7-5

User Manual
M900/M1800 Base Transceiver Station (BTS30)

BTS Maintenance Terminal System


Chapter 7 Board Maintenance

7.5 Change Board Administrative State


I. Function
The meaning of the operations on the TRX board administrative state is the same as
on the BT administrative state in the logic object operations. In board operations,
operations on the administrative state of the channel of the BT corresponding to the
TRX can also be performed. And it also means the same as with the operations on
the administrative state of channel objects.

II. Access
To operate on the administrative state of the logic object: Right click on the icon of the
board, and select [Administrative State/Locked] or [Administrative State/
Unlocked].
To operate on a certain channel of the logic object: Right click on the icon of the board,
and select [Administrative State/Block Channel], and select the channel to be
operated on.
See Figure 7-9.

Figure 7-9 Change board administrative state

7-6

User Manual
M900/M1800 Base Transceiver Station (BTS30)

BTS Maintenance Terminal System


Chapter 7 Board Maintenance

7.6 Board Information


I. Function
To query the software version and the number of alarms generated during board
maintenance.

II. Access
Right click on the icon of the board, and select [Board Information]. The result of the
query will be displayed in the pop-up interface, as shown in Figure 7-10.

Figure 7-10 Board information

7.7 Loop Test


I. Function
To test if the link between the board and the TMU is normal.
The initialization and maintenance of the boards in BTS are accomplished with the
TMU, the BTS operation and maintenance unit, therefore links between the boards
and the TMU are very important.

II. Access
Right click on the icon of the board, and select [Loop Test]. The interface [Loop Test]
will pop up, as shown in Figure 7-11.

7-7

User Manual
M900/M1800 Base Transceiver Station (BTS30)

BTS Maintenance Terminal System


Chapter 7 Board Maintenance

Figure 7-11 Board loop test

III. Interface description


For the description of the interface [Loop Test], see Table 7-1.
Table 7-1 Description of the interface [Loop Test]
Field

Description

Value range

Data Length

Valid single-frame data length of the loop test command issued by


the TMU to the board.

Initial Data

Valid initial data of the loop test command issued by the TMU to the
0 ~ 255
board.

Data Step
Length

Data increment length of the loop test command issued by the TMU
0 ~ 255
to the board.

1 ~ 220

7.8 Board Alarm


I. Function
BTS reports on the abnormality that occurs during BTS operation it to the BSC side in
the form of an alarm.
The maintenance personnel can observe the real-time alarms through the alarm
message window at the maintenance terminal of the BTS to facilitate the
maintenance operations. They can also obtain information on alarms by querying
them.

7-8

User Manual
M900/M1800 Base Transceiver Station (BTS30)

BTS Maintenance Terminal System


Chapter 7 Board Maintenance

II. Access
Right click on the icon of the board, and select [Board Alarm]. The interface [Board
Alarm Information] will pop up. On the left of this window is a visual diagram for
board alarms, where each grid stands for an alarm. If the grid is green, the
corresponding board is normal, while if red, the board is faulty. In this case, click the
grid that is red, and a detailed explanation of the alarm will be displayed in the
sub-window on the right of the interface, as shown in Figure 7-12.

Figure 7-12 Board alarm information

7.9 MCK Clock Operation


I. Function
The BTS clock can work both in the mode of internal clock (free-run mode), external
clock (phase-locked mode) and external synchronization clock. The selection of the
operational mode of the BTS clock can be done through TMU maintenance.

II. Access
In the TMU maintenance menu, select [Set CLK Hardware Parameters], then select
the clock mode and input the parameters in the pop-up interface. Then click <OK>,
and the operational result will be displayed in the window, as shown in Figure 7-13.

7-9

User Manual
M900/M1800 Base Transceiver Station (BTS30)

BTS Maintenance Terminal System


Chapter 7 Board Maintenance

Figure 7-13 Select the MCK clock mode

III. Interface description


For the description of the above interface, see Table 7-2.
Table 7-2 MCK clock mode selection
Field

Clock mode

Set DAC

Description

Value range

Internal clock: the BTS clock unit works in free-run mode and can
not ensure the synchronization with the network clock.
External clock: the BTS clock unit works in phase-locked mode,
and is in synchronization with the network clock.
This parameter is an adjustment of the crystal oscillation voltage. 0000~4095 (decimal)

7.10 Set MDC Parameters


I. Function
To set the CDU parameters of the BTS antenna and feeder part in board
maintenance.

II. Access
In the CDU maintenance menu (refer to section 7.1), select [Set MDC Parameters],
input appropriate parameters in the pop-up interface, click <OK>, and the operational
result will be displayed in the status bar, as shown in Figure 7-14.

7-10

User Manual
M900/M1800 Base Transceiver Station (BTS30)

BTS Maintenance Terminal System


Chapter 7 Board Maintenance

Figure 7-14 Set MDC parameters

III. Interface description


For the description of the above interface, see Table 7-3.
Table 7-3 Description of the interface [Set MDC Parameters]
Field

Description

Value range

Device type

CDU( combiner and splitter); HYCM


( combiner); SPL (splitter)

Subroute No.

Tributary No. of uplink signal

Attenuation value

Power attenuation for the uplink signal 0 ~ 15 dB

0: main tower top amplifier; 1: diversity


tower top amplifier

7.11 CDU Operation


I. Function
To provide the control function for switching on/off the tower top amplifier in CDU
maintenance.

II. Access
In the CDU maintenance menu, select [CDU Operation], select the operation to be
performed in the pop-up interface, click <OK>, and the operational result will be
displayed in the status bar, as shown in Figure 7-15.

7-11

User Manual
M900/M1800 Base Transceiver Station (BTS30)

BTS Maintenance Terminal System


Chapter 7 Board Maintenance

Figure 7-15 CDU operation

7-12

HUAWEI

M900/M1800 Base Transceiver Station (BTS30)


User Manual

Part 3 BTS Maintenance

User Manual
M900/M1800 Base Transceiver Station (BTS30)

BTS Maintenance
Table of Contents

Table of Contents
Chapter 1 Routine Maintenance Instructions............................................................................. 1-1
1.1 Routine Maintenance Overview......................................................................................... 1-1
1.1.1 Purpose of Routine Maintenance............................................................................ 1-1
1.1.2 Routine Maintenance Classification ........................................................................ 1-1
1.1.3 BTS Routine Maintenance Record & Instructions................................................... 1-2
1.2 Weekly Maintenance Instructions ...................................................................................... 1-8
1.3 Monthly Maintenance Instructions ..................................................................................... 1-9
1.4 Quarterly Maintenance Instructions ................................................................................... 1-9
1.5 Yearly Maintenance Instructions...................................................................................... 1-10
1.6 Return Loss, VSWR and Reflection Coefficient .............................................................. 1-11
Chapter 2 Fault Analysis and Location ....................................................................................... 2-1
2.1 Communication Fault......................................................................................................... 2-1
2.1.1 Introduction to Mobile Station's Search for the Network ......................................... 2-1
2.1.2 Call Failure .............................................................................................................. 2-2
2.1.3 No Voice Heard after the Call is Connected ........................................................... 2-5
2.1.4 Unidirectional Talk................................................................................................... 2-6
2.1.5 Poor Voice Quality .................................................................................................. 2-7
2.1.6 Conversation Interruption........................................................................................ 2-8
2.1.7 Cross Talk ............................................................................................................... 2-9
2.1.8 Mobile Station Frequently Disconnected from the Network.................................... 2-9
2.1.9 Immediate Assignment Rejection.......................................................................... 2-10
2.2 Network Fault................................................................................................................... 2-11
2.2.1 Mobile Station Fails to Find a Network ................................................................. 2-11
2.2.2 Mobile Station Fails to Access the Network.......................................................... 2-12
2.2.3 MS Frequent Location Updating ........................................................................... 2-15
2.3 Loading Fault ................................................................................................................... 2-16
2.3.1 Software Loading Failure ...................................................................................... 2-16
2.3.2 Base Station Initialization Failure .......................................................................... 2-18
2.4 Signaling Fault ................................................................................................................. 2-20
2.4.1 OML Link Blocked ................................................................................................. 2-20
2.4.2 RSL Link Blocked .................................................................................................. 2-21
2.5 Antenna and Feeder System Fault .................................................................................. 2-22
2.6 Optical Channel Fault ...................................................................................................... 2-23
2.7 Board Fault ...................................................................................................................... 2-24
2.7.1 CDU....................................................................................................................... 2-24
2.7.2 EDU....................................................................................................................... 2-26
2.7.3 PBU ....................................................................................................................... 2-29

User Manual
M900/M1800 Base Transceiver Station (BTS30)

BTS Maintenance
Table of Contents

2.7.4 PMU ...................................................................................................................... 2-31


2.7.5 PSU ....................................................................................................................... 2-34
2.7.6 TES ....................................................................................................................... 2-36
2.7.7 TEU ....................................................................................................................... 2-37
2.7.8 TMU....................................................................................................................... 2-39
2.7.9 TRX ....................................................................................................................... 2-42

ii

User Manual
M900/M1800 Base Transceiver Station (BTS30)

BTS Maintenance
Chapter 1 Routine Maintenance Instructions

Chapter 1 Routine Maintenance Instructions


1.1 Routine Maintenance Overview
1.1.1 Purpose of Routine Maintenance
Reliable running of the BTS depends on effective routine maintenance. The aim of
such maintenance is to detect and solve problems in time.
This chapter describes the contents of routine maintenance and the correct operation
procedures, thus providing the basic methods and reference basis of routine
maintenance for users in deciding local office maintenance solutions.

1.1.2 Routine Maintenance Classification


I. Classification by Implementing Methods
1)

Conventional maintenance

To observe, test and analyze the equipment performance and operating conditions by
means of normal maintenance.
2)

Unconventional maintenance

To check whether the equipment performance has degraded by observing, testing


and analyzing it in artificially-created special conditions.
For example, to avoid alarm system fault, the maintenance personnel can deliberately
create some faults and check whether the alarm system can generate reports
correctly.

II. Classification by Period Length


1)

Unscheduled maintenance

Maintenance tasks incurred by equipment fault and network adjustment.


For example, the maintenance operations required at the time of user complaint,
equipment damage and line fault are unscheduled. In addition, problems found and
recorded in routine maintenance are also one of the triggering factors of unscheduled
maintenance operations.
2)

Daily routine maintenance

1-1

User Manual
M900/M1800 Base Transceiver Station (BTS30)

BTS Maintenance
Chapter 1 Routine Maintenance Instructions

Maintenance operations conducted every day, which help the maintenance personnel
keep track of equipment running conditions and solve problems in time.
When a problem is found in daily maintenance, please record in detail the exact
physical position where it occurs and describe it in detail, so that maintenance
operations can be conducted in time to avoid bigger trouble.
3)

Periodical routine maintenance

Maintenance operations conducted regularly, which help the maintenance personnel


keep track of the long-time performance of the equipment.
Periodical routine maintenance includes quarterly and yearly maintenance.

1.1.3 BTS Routine Maintenance Record & Instructions


BTS Weekly Maintenance Record
Please note down in this record the operations actually conducted in BTS weekly
maintenance. For methods of conducting weekly maintenance operations, please
refer to BTS Weekly Maintenance Instructions.
BTS Monthly Maintenance Record
Please note down in this record the operations actually conducted in BTS monthly
maintenance. For methods of conducting monthly maintenance operations, please
refer to BTS Monthly Maintenance Instructions.
BTS Quarterly Maintenance Record
Please note down in this record the operations actually conducted in BTS quarterly
maintenance. For methods of conducting quarterly maintenance operations, please
refer to BTS Quarterly Maintenance Instructions.
BTS Yearly Maintenance Record
Please note down in this record the operations actually conducted in BTS yearly
maintenance. For methods of conducting yearly maintenance operations, please refer
to BTS Yearly Maintenance Instructions.
BTS Unexpected Fault Handling Record
Please note down in this record the operations actually conducted in clearing the
unexpected faults that come up in BTS routine maintenance.
This record serves as a basis for future reference in equipment maintenance. The
maintenance personnel may modify the list of items in this record according to the
actual conditions of the local office, and compile several sheets of records into a
handbook on the clearing of unexpected faults.

1-2

User Manual
M900/M1800 Base Transceiver Station (BTS30)

BTS Maintenance
Chapter 1 Routine Maintenance Instructions

I. BTS Unexpected Fault Handling Record


Site name

Home BSC

Time when faults occur

Time when faults


get solved

Person on duty

Faults handled by

Fault type:
Primary power supply

Secondary power supply

Baseband frame

TRX frame

Antenna and feeder system

Others

Sources of fault information


Subscriber complaints

Alarm system

Discovery in daily maintenance

Other sources

Fault description:

Handling methods and results:

1-3

User Manual
M900/M1800 Base Transceiver Station (BTS30)

BTS Maintenance
Chapter 1 Routine Maintenance Instructions

II. BTS Weekly Maintenance Record


Site name:
Maintenance time:
Maintenance item

Maintenance personnel:
Maintenance status

Environment condition

Normal

Abnormal

Temperature condition

Normal

Abnormal

Humidity condition

Normal

Abnormal

Dust-proof condition

Normal

Abnormal

Indoor air-conditioner running state

Normal

Abnormal

Board running state

Normal

Abnormal

Fault description and


handling

Problems remained

Checked by shift
leader

1-4

Remarks

Maintenance
personnel

User Manual
M900/M1800 Base Transceiver Station (BTS30)

BTS Maintenance
Chapter 1 Routine Maintenance Instructions

III. BTS Monthly Maintenance Record


Site name:
Maintenance time:
Maintenance item

Maintenance personnel:
Maintenance status

Call test

Normal
Abnormal

Check working status of battery set

Normal
Abnormal

Check grounding, lightning arrester and power supply


system

Normal
Abnormal

Check running status of antenna and feeder

Normal
Abnormal

Check running status of secondary power supply

Normal
Abnormal

Fault description and


handling

Problems remained

Checked by shift leader

1-5

Remarks

Maintenance
personnel

User Manual
M900/M1800 Base Transceiver Station (BTS30)

BTS Maintenance
Chapter 1 Routine Maintenance Instructions

IV. BTS Quarterly Maintenance Record


Site name:
Maintenance time:
Maintenance item

Maintenance personnel:
Maintenance status

Check primary power supply

Normal
Abnormal

Check running conditions of fan

Normal
Abnormal

Road test

Normal
Abnormal

VSWR test

Normal
Abnormal

Check alarm collecting devices

Normal
Abnormal

Fault description and


the handling

Problems remained

Checked by shift
leader

1-6

Remarks

Maintenance
personnel

User Manual
M900/M1800 Base Transceiver Station (BTS30)

BTS Maintenance
Chapter 1 Routine Maintenance Instructions

V. BTS Yearly Maintenance Record


Site name:
Maintenance time:
Maintenance item

Maintenance personnel:
Maintenance status

Check running state of channel

Normal

Abnormal

Cabinet cleanness

Normal

Abnormal

Check base station power output

Normal

Abnormal

Earth resistance test and grounding cable


check

Normal

Abnormal

Check the waterproof status of antenna and


feeder connectors and lightning-proof
grounding cards

Normal

Abnormal

Check the firmness of antenna and tower-top


amplifier and the tilting angle of directional
antenna

Normal

Abnormal

Fault description and


handling

Problems remained

Checked by shift
leader

1-7

Remarks

Maintenance personnel

User Manual
M900/M1800 Base Transceiver Station (BTS30)

BTS Maintenance
Chapter 1 Routine Maintenance Instructions

1.2 Weekly Maintenance Instructions


Maintenance item

Environment condition

Operation instructions

Reference standard

Check the machine room for any


environment alarm including power
supply, fire and smoke alarms.

Everything should be normal. No alarm


appears.

Check the anti-theft net, doors and


windows, and other facilities in the
equipment room.

The facilities including anti-theft net,


doors and windows ought to be intact.

Temperature condition

Observe the thermometer indication in Normal equipment room environmental


the equipment room.
temperature: 15 C~30 C.

Humidity condition

Observe the hygrometer indication in


the equipment room.

Dust-proof condition

All items should be clean without any


visible dust attaching. Then the
Observe equipment housing,
dust-proof condition is good. If any item
equipment interior, floor and desktop.
is not up to the standard, then the
dust-proof condition is bad.

Indoor air conditioner running status

Check whether it is normally running The indication of the thermometer is


and whether the refrigeration function consistent with the temperature set and
is good.
the refrigeration system works.

Board running status

Observe whether indicators of all


boards are normal.

1-8

Normal equipment room environmental


humidity: 40% ~ 65%.

User Manual
M900/M1800 Base Transceiver Station (BTS30)

BTS Maintenance
Chapter 1 Routine Maintenance Instructions

1.3 Monthly Maintenance Instructions


Maintenance item

Operation instructions

Reference standard

Call Test

Use the testor mobile station to


perform call test with another one
cooperating beside the BSC, and
observe whether calls are normal
over all channels.

Check the running status of battery


sets

Check whether there is liquid


leakage regarding the battery, or the
connection is loose.

Check the grounding, lightning


arrester and power supply systems

Check whether the grounding


system and lightning protection
system are working normally,
whether the connection is reliable,
whether the power supply system is
working normally and whether there
is any scorch for the lightening
arrester.

Make sure the signal lightning


arrester, power supply lightning
arrester, antenna and feeder lightning
arrester are in good condition.

Check the working status of antenna


and feeder system

Check whether there is standing


wave alarm, whether there is
deviation of antenna support, and
whether the waterproofness of the
feeder line is good.

Check whether there is standing wave


alarm from CDU.

Check the running conditions of


secondary power supply boards

See whether they are operating


normally

No alarm.

There should be no noises,


interruptions or crosstalk.

1.4 Quarterly Maintenance Instructions


Maintenance item

Operation instructions

Primary power check

Measure the output voltage and the


voltage of each battery, and check
the aging of DC power cable.

Check running conditions of fan

Check whether the fan runs normally


or whether there are alarms

Road test

Use the testor mobile station to test


the switch-over function and the
coverage.

VSWR test

Check the CDU VSWR alarm


indicator

Check alarm collecting device

Humidity, temperature, fire alarm


etc.

1-9

Reference standard
Output voltage <-43.5V
Battery voltage error < 0.3V
No alarm

Test whether the transmitting power


is normal.

User Manual
M900/M1800 Base Transceiver Station (BTS30)

BTS Maintenance
Chapter 1 Routine Maintenance Instructions

1.5 Yearly Maintenance Instructions


Maintenance item

Operation instructions

Reference standard

Check running conditions of channel

Use the testor mobile station to test


the communication conditions of
respective channels. Observe
whether there are call drop, call
interruption, noise and single-sided
communication, and make record for
future reference.

Cabinet cleanness

Tools: vacuum cleaner, alcohol,


towel etc.

Set strict operation regulations to


avoid mis-touching switch or power
supply accidentally.

Check base station output power

Measure TRX transmitting power.

Check whether it is consistent with


the BSC setting.

1. Measure earth resistance with an


earth resistance meter.
Earth resistance test and grounding
cable check

Check the waterproof conditions of


the connectors and lightning
grounding clips
Check the firmness of antenna and
tower top amplifier and the tilting
angle of the antenna

2. Examine whether the connectors


of respective grounding cables are
loose and check their aging
condition.
Check the external part or untie the
insulating tape to have a check
1. Screw up the nut again with a
wrench.
2. Use an angle meter to check the
titling angle.

1-10

Reseal it with the same material!

Do not apply too much force when


screwing up the nut with the wrench.

User Manual
M900/M1800 Base Transceiver Station (BTS30)

BTS Maintenance
Chapter 1 Routine Maintenance Instructions

1.6 Return Loss, VSWR and Reflection Coefficient


Return loss (dB)

VSWR

Reflection coefficient ()

4.41943

0.63096

3.56977

0.56234

3.00952

0.50119

2.61457

0.44668

2.32285

0.39811

2.09988

0.35481

10

1.92495

0.31623

11

1.78489

0.28184

12

1.6709

0.25119

13

1.57689

0.22387

14

1.49852

0.19953

15

1.43258

0.17783

16

1.37668

0.15849

17

1.32898

0.14125

18

1.28805

0.12589

19

1.25276

0.1122

20

1.22222

0.1

21

1.19569

0.08913

22

1.17257

0.07943

23

1.15238

0.07079

24

1.13469

0.0631

25

1.11917

0.05623

26

1.10553

0.05012

27

1.09351

0.04467

28

1.08292

0.03981

29

1.07357

0.03548

30

1.06531

0.03162

31

1.058

0.02818

32

1.05153

0.02512

33

1.0458

0.02239

1-11

User Manual
M900/M1800 Base Transceiver Station (BTS30)

BTS Maintenance
Chapter 1 Routine Maintenance Instructions

Return loss (dB)

VSWR

Reflection coefficient ()

34

1.04072

0.01995

35

1.03621

0.01778

36

1.03221

0.01585

37

1.02866

0.01413

38

1.0255

0.01259

39

1.0227

0.01122

40

1.0202

0.01

41

1.01799

0.00891

42

1.01601

0.00794

43

1.01426

0.00708

44

1.0127

0.00631

45

1.01131

0.00562

46

1.01007

0.00501

47

1.00897

0.00447

48

1.00799

0.00398

49

1.00712

0.00355

50

1.00634

0.00316

1-12

User Manual
M900/M1800 Base Transceiver Station (BTS30)

BTS Maintenance
Chapter 1 Routine Maintenance Instructions

Formulas for calculating reflection coefficient , return Loss RL, and VSWR is
displayed in the following table:
Reflection coefficient
=

Ureflected
Uforward

VSWR
VSWR=

1
R
alog( 20 )
VSWR1
VSWR+1

VSWR=

VSWR=

Uforward+Ureflected
UforwardUreflected

1+

Return loss (RL) Z1=Z2=Z3


VSWR=

Uforward+Ureflected
UforwardUreflected

RL= 20log

R
alog( 20 )+1
R
alog( 20 )

1-13

RL= 20log

VSWR+1
VSWR1

User Manual
M900/M1800 Base Transceiver Station (BTS30)

BTS Maintenance
Chapter 2 Fault Analysis and Location

Chapter 2 Fault Analysis and Location


2.1 Communication Fault
2.1.1 Introduction to Mobile Station's Search for the Network
Mobile stations may operate either in the HPLMN (Home Public Land Mobile
Network), or in other PLMNs. There are two modes for a mobile station to select the
serving network:
z

Automatic network search

Manual network search

After a mobile station (with a SIM card or after a SIM card is inserted) is powered on,
the mobile station searches for the PLMN it logged in last time. If the PLMN does
exist, the mobile station attempts to log in.
z

If the login succeeds, the mobile station will be served by this PLMN.

If the login fails because no appropriate cell is available, the mobile station will
search at least thirty 900M channels or forty 1800M channels (The process of
searching the radio frequency channels actually includes the selection of PLMN).

If the login fails due to the failure of location updating, then it is unnecessary to
select the above mentioned frequency channels. However, the available PLMNs
must be displayed to the subscriber. Subscribers can then select network in
automatic or manual mode.

In automatic network search mode, the mobile station selects the network according
to the priority of PLMN list it has saved. While in manual mode, the mobile station
displays the available networks to the subscriber and tries to log in to the specified
PLMN according to the subscriber's selection.
Network search may be affected by the roaming process of the mobile station. This
process can be classified into two types:
z

International roaming

Domestic roaming

International roaming: in which the mobile station logs in to other PLMNs in a different
country from where the HPLMN is located.
Domestic roaming: in which the mobile station logs in to other PLMNs in the same
country where the HPLMN is located in. When the mobile station is roaming across
the country, it will search for a HPLMN periodically. To prevent a mobile station from
logging in frequently to a prohibited Location Area (LA) during domestic roaming, the
2-1

User Manual
M900/M1800 Base Transceiver Station (BTS30)

BTS Maintenance
Chapter 2 Fault Analysis and Location

mobile station saves this LA in a table named "Forbidden Las for domestic roaming"
of the mobile station equipment. This table will be cleared when the mobile station is
powered off or when the SIM card is pulled out.
In addition, the mobile station saves in its own SIM card some of the PLMNs where
services are prohibited. Only when these PLMNs are selected in the manual network
search mode and the location updating succeeds can these PLMNs be deleted from
the service-prohibited PLMN table.
Failure of mobile station network search indicates the failure in selecting a PLMN or a
cell.

2.1.2 Call Failure


I. Fault Description
When the mobile station is powered on and detects a network, the following occur
after subscriber dial-up:
1) No ringing at the called MS after dialing though that MS is idle.
2) After dialing, the caller hears the ring-back tone, but the call is automatically
disconnected.
3) After dialing, the caller hears the ring-back tone, but the call is automatically
disconnected when the called answers.

II. Fault Analysis and Location


The failure of an MS in originating calls might be related to the fault of BTS, BSC,
MSC or the PSTN.

2-2

User Manual
M900/M1800 Base Transceiver Station (BTS30)

BTS Maintenance
Chapter 2 Fault Analysis and Location

III. Troubleshooting Procedure


Start
Check Abis interface

Immediate
assignment

No

SDCCH
available?

No

Re-configure or increase
the cell capacity

Yes

Check the setting of


paging parameter

No

Re-configure or increase
the cell capacity

Yes

Assignment
is over

No

TCHF
available?

Yes

Radio link
fails

No

Yes

Yes

Check the measurement


report
B

2-3

Check Abis interface


data mapping relationship

User Manual
M900/M1800 Base Transceiver Station (BTS30)
A

BTS Maintenance
Chapter 2 Fault Analysis and Location

B
Possible causes:
1. Improper BTS connection
Receiving quality
is too poor

Yes

3. Too much air interference


4. BSC clock is not accurate enough

No

No route at network side

2. Poor TMU clock precision

5. Problems with antenna and feeder system

Yes

Possible causes:
1. Incorrect connection of BSC switching
2. TC board abnormal
3. A-interface blocked
4. MSC unable to obtain the No. Of roaming subscribers
5. Some routes are blocked at MSC side

No

Other causes

Possible causes:
FTC program abnormal

End

Figure 2-1 Troubleshooting procedures for call failure


To clear the faults in originating calls, follow the instructions below:
1) Trace and check Abis interface message via the interface in BSC maintenance
console.
2) If the immediate assignment fails, check if any assignment failed because
SDCCHs are insufficient.
Y The cell capacity is not large enough.
In this case, re-configure or expand the cell capacity.
N The failure of immediate assignment may be caused by data configuration
errors.
In this case, check the setting of paging parameters of the cell at the data
management console.
3) If instead of immediate assignment failure there is TCH assignment failure, check
whether the TCHs are insufficient.
Y The cell capacity is not large enough.
2-4

User Manual
M900/M1800 Base Transceiver Station (BTS30)

BTS Maintenance
Chapter 2 Fault Analysis and Location

In this case, re-configure or expand the cell capacity.


N Check Abis interface data mapping relationship at the data management
console.
4) If the radio link failure occurs after the TCH channel is established, observe the
measurement report on the channel before the failure.
Poor quality of BTS or MS signals may be the result of the following factors:
z

Improper BTS connection

Low TMU clock precision

Too much air interference

BSC clock not accurate enough

Problems with the antenna and feeder system

Blind spots in network coverage

The causes for absence of route at network side that causes the disconnection of
links may be:
z

Connection error of BSC switching network

Abnormality of FTC board

Blocking of A-interface

Failure of MSC in get roaming subscriber number

Blocking of some routes at MSC side

2.1.3 No Voice Heard after the Call is Connected


I. ault Description
There is ringing at the called mobile station, but no voice is heard when the called
subscriber answers to the call.

II. Fault Analysis and Location


The ringing at the called mobile station indicates that the signaling flow is normal. The
voice generation failure may be related to multiple aspects:
1) The failure of corresponding timeslots of FTC, which is the only place where the
voice can be converted from voice signals of 16K into that of 64K.
2) Switching network failure, which disables proper switching of voice timeslots.
3) Activation failure of DTX voice transmission.
4) Call re-establishment failure, which causes the signaling course being switched
over before the time specified in data configuration, but the switching circuit did not
receive the indication of change properly, therefore, the circuit failed to react to the
change.
2-5

User Manual
M900/M1800 Base Transceiver Station (BTS30)

BTS Maintenance
Chapter 2 Fault Analysis and Location

5) Abnormality of TMU board.

III. Troubleshooting Procedure


1) Check the occupation of network board timeslots to see whether the network is
distributed correctly, i.e., check whether both TCHs have been switched over
correctly.
2) Switch off the DTX to see whether the fault reappears.
3) Check signaling analyzer or Abis signaling interface tracing through BSC
maintenance console to see whether there are any messages about call
re-establishment failure.
4) Reset TMU board to see whether the phenomenon reappears.
5) If the phenomenon persists, there may be erroneous switching at the fixed network
side.
6) Plug in/pull out or replace FTC board to see whether the phenomenon reappears.
If not, it is the board that fails.

2.1.4 Unidirectional Talk


I. Fault Description
Mobile station can make calls, but:
1) When both the two parties use an MS for conversation, one of them cannot hear
the other.
2) When one of the two parties uses an MS and the other a fixed phone for
conversation, one of them cannot hear the other.

II. Fault Analysis and Location


Judging from that one of the two parties can hear the other, the signaling flow is
normal.
Then, this fault may be caused by:
1) Mobile phone transmitter fault.
2) Activation failure of DTX voice transmission.
3) GNET board exchange error, which disables the up-link of one party from being
switched properly to the down-link circuit of the other party.
4) Some links on FTC Board are blocked.

2-6

User Manual
M900/M1800 Base Transceiver Station (BTS30)

BTS Maintenance
Chapter 2 Fault Analysis and Location

III. Troubleshooting Procedure


1) Does this occur repeatedly to some MSs? If so, the transmitter function of the
mobile station may be faulty.
2) Switch off the DTX to see whether the fault still exists.
3) View the occupation status of GNET board timeslots to see whether the circuits are
switched normally by querying GNET board status on BSC maintenance console.
4) Trace and query the circuit status at MSC. If some circuit ports are always
disconnected, block the port or replace FTC board.
5) Check whether there is any Public network faults.

2.1.5 Poor Voice Quality


I. Fault Description
The mobile station can detect a network after it is powered on, and can make/receive
calls, but the voice quality is poor.

II. Fault Analysis and Location


If the mobile station can make calls, the signaling channels are normal.
Poor voice quality indicates that the voice BER (Bit Error Ratio) at the radio interface
is high. Generally, high BER during decoding at the base station is caused by low
receiving level or degrading of clock precision.

III. Troubleshooting Procedure


1) Determine whether the fault is related to the TRX or any timeslots of it. If yes, reset
or replace the TRX.
2) Check the strength of MS signal. If the signal is weak, it could be that the receiving
level is too low. In this case, make a call in the open space.
3) With the help of signaling analyzing instruments or by tracing Abis interface
messages at BSC maintenance console, determine which of the two is unsatisfactory,
the uplink level, or the down link level.
z

If the up-link level is poor, please check whether the power supply of the mobile
station is sufficient.

If the down link level is poor, the fault may be caused by the coverage. In this
case, check whether the radio frequency is degrading or whether the subscriber
is at the edge of a cell.

2-7

User Manual
M900/M1800 Base Transceiver Station (BTS30)

BTS Maintenance
Chapter 2 Fault Analysis and Location

4) Ask the subscriber to check whether the power supply of the mobile station is
sufficient.
5) If the receiving level is OK but BER is high, the fault may be caused by the
instability of the clock. In this case, try to relocate the network by measuring the
precision of BTS, BSC clocks.
6) If both the receiving level and BER are OK, check the interference on the
transmission links between BSC and BTS.
7) Check antenna and feeder system.

2.1.6 Conversation Interruption


I. Fault Description
Conversation interruption during the normal process of a conversation of a mobile
station refers to the fact that there is no voice heard for a while, or the voice is
intermittent.

II. Fault Analysis and Location


Conversation interruption is related to the faults of BTS, BSC, MSC or PSTN. It
possibly results from the negative impact of the environment or the degrading of
equipment performance.

III. Troubleshooting Procedure


The fact that voice is heard during the conversation indicates that the speech channel
has been established and kept in service. But the intermittence of the voice indicates
that there are some break points in the link, which hinders the normal transmission of
the voice to the receiving end and causes conversation interruption.
Follow the instruction below to clear the fault:
1) Check whether the FTC board is normal. If not, reset it

(or replace it if

necessary).
High BER at the network side and BTS side may be the result of low precision of BSC
or BTS clock, or the interference between transmission links.
2) Check whether the TRX sensitivity is too low.
If yes, replace the TRX.
3) Check whether the fault is caused by co-frequency interference among cells.
If yes, reconfigure cell data.

2-8

User Manual
M900/M1800 Base Transceiver Station (BTS30)

BTS Maintenance
Chapter 2 Fault Analysis and Location

4) Check whether the receiving antenna and feeder are normal.


If no, check whether there is water-penetration, corrosion or short-circuit with the
receiving antenna and feeder, and take corresponding measures.
5) Check whether the mobile station is located too far away from the BTS, or in blind
area, and take corresponding measures.
6) Check if the fixed network equipment is abnormal, and take corresponding
measures.

2.1.7 Cross Talk


I. Fault Description
The voice from another channel is heard in the course of normal conversation of the
mobile station.

II. Fault Analysis and Location


Cross talk is most possibly caused by timeslot exchange error, i.e., the signals of
another speech channel are switched to the timeslot currently engaged in the
conversation. As a result, the subscriber affected may either hear the voice from the
ongoing conversation among some other subscribers, hear nothing at all, or cannot
be heard by the other party engaged in the conversation with him.

III. Troubleshooting Procedure


1) Check GNET board networking to see whether there is any missing or duplicated
networking.
2) Check the exchange of timeslots at the switch side. Fault of this exchange is
common in fixed network.

2.1.8 Mobile Station Frequently Disconnected from the Network


I. Fault Description
1) When the MS is idle, it happens frequently that the MS sometimes display the
network it accessed and sometimes not, indicating that the MS is frequently
disconnected from the network.
2) The MS is frequently disconnected from the network while in the course of
communication.

2-9

User Manual
M900/M1800 Base Transceiver Station (BTS30)

BTS Maintenance
Chapter 2 Fault Analysis and Location

II. Fault Analysis and Location


When the MS receives system message and calculates the parameters such as C1, it
finds that the cell where it is located no longer meets the requirements of the
protocols. However, no other cells are detected appropriate to serve as the substitute.
In this case, the mobile station disconnects from the network.

III. Troubleshooting Procedure


1) Check whether the system message is sent properly, whether the reselected
parameters of the cell and the parameters of random access control changes
frequently.
2) Check with the tester MS whether the value of C1 displayed on the MS is too small.
If yes, check whether the parameters that may affect the value of C1 are set properly,
such as MS RXLEV_ACCESS_MIN, MS maximum transmission power allowable, etc.
Check the up-link and down-link receiving levels to see whether the MS is located in
an area of poor coverage.
3) Check whether the BTS output is stable. If not, check whether the TRX output is
normal or whether the antenna is fixed in a stable manner.

2.1.9 Immediate Assignment Rejection


I. Fault Description
From Abis interface, it can be observed that immediate assignment rejection message
is sent on CCCH channel in the course of SDCCH channels assigning.

II. Fault Analysis and Location


This fault is caused by the absence of SDCCH channels available for the assignment.

III. Troubleshooting Procedure


1) Check whether BSC data configuration is correct, such as radio channel
configuration table, and so on.
2) Observe at BTS maintenance console whether SDCCH channels are blocked or
whether they are available. Unblock them if they are in BLOCKED state.

2-10

User Manual
M900/M1800 Base Transceiver Station (BTS30)

BTS Maintenance
Chapter 2 Fault Analysis and Location

2.2 Network Fault


2.2.1 Mobile Station Fails to Find a Network
I. Fault Description
1) The message 'No Network' is displayed at the MS.
2) There is no display at the MS at all.
3) There is no home PLMN in the network list displayed at the MS.

II. Fault Analysis and Location


1)

The cell is not in service

At the BTS maintenance console, select [Obtain Cell Attributes] to view the
information of the corresponding cell.
If it is prompted that 'Cell is not initialized', the cell then is not in service.
If the information on the corresponding cell is displayed, the cell then is already in
service.
2)

Trace Abis interface message flow and observe whether there is any channel
request

If no channel request is detected to be directed to this cell, either the network or the
individual MS may be faulty.
The causes of network fault may be:
z

BS hardware fault

At the BTS maintenance console, check whether the operating status or the status
indicators of respective boards are normal. Check if the attributes of TRX and TMU
boards are consistent with the data configuration of the data management console,
and whether the BSC clock is locked by the clock board. If all these items are normal,
test whether the power output of the antenna and feeder is normal.
z

Incorrect system message

Check whether the configurations of CI, LAI, BSIC and CCCH are consistent with
those in the radio channel configuration table.
The causes of individual MS fault may be:
z

The MS is not located in a suitable place and RXQUAL (signal quality) is poor or
RXLEV (signal level) is too low. Move the MS to an open place and try again.

The battery of the MS is low.

2-11

User Manual
M900/M1800 Base Transceiver Station (BTS30)

BTS Maintenance
Chapter 2 Fault Analysis and Location

III. Troubleshooting Procedure


1)

Initializing the cell and the site

If the cell is not in service, reset the site hierarchically.


Please note that this may affect the other cells under this site.
During the initialization, the progress of the initialization will be displayed.
Base station initialization is embodied by the initialization of site and cell.
Site initialization procedure:
z

Set site logic object

Set site hardware object

Set site extended attributes

Establish multi-point connection

Site activation

Cell initialization procedure:


z

Create TEI

Establish signaling channel connection

Establish traffic channel connection

Set cell attributes

Set cell extended attributes

Set RC attributes

Set RC extended attributes

Set channel attributes

Set cell alarm threshold

Cell activation

Wait for cell status change report

The result of these two types of initialization will be displayed at the maintenance
console on a realtime basis. If the operation succeeds, a solid star will be displayed. If
the operation fails, a hollow star together with the cause of failure will be displayed.
2)

Clearing hardware problem

If the system messages are wrong, correct them. Set the whole table and validate
them with the help of dynamic data configuration.

2.2.2 Mobile Station Fails to Access the Network


I. Fault Description
1) The MS displays 'No Services' or 'Only Emergence Call', or does not display
anything at all.

2-12

User Manual
M900/M1800 Base Transceiver Station (BTS30)

BTS Maintenance
Chapter 2 Fault Analysis and Location

2) One or more networks are detected when manual searching of networks is


performed.
3) From Abis interface, no message can be observed or 'Location Updating Rejection'
is observed.
4) The indicator of OML link of LAPD board flashes quickly or is off.
5) The indicator of RSL link of LAPD board flashes quickly or is off.

II. Fault Analysis and Location


1) No SIM card is installed. Please insert a SIM card.
2) The battery of the MS is low. Please recharge the battery.
3) The cell is not in service. For details, refer to the troubleshooting procedure of this
section.
4) If RSL is disconnected, the indicator of RSL link on LAPD board flashes quickly or
is off. For details, refer to '4 Signaling Fault' of this module.
5) If OML is disconnected, the indicator of OML link on LAPD board blinks quickly or
is off. For details, refer to '4 Signaling Fault' of this module.
6) System message is incorrect.
7) If a dual-band MS is forcedly set as a single band 1800M (or 900M) MS, then it can
not access the 900M network (or 1800M network).
8) If some internal settings of the MS are improperly modified, the MS may fail to
access the network.

III. Troubleshooting Procedure


If the cell is not in service, then perform level-4 resetting to the site and check
whether the initialization flow is normal.
1) Is the cell activated?
Y Step 3).
N Step 2).
To judge whether the cell has been activated:
Select [Obtain Cell Attributes] to view for the information of the corresponding cell at
the base station maintenance console. If it is prompted 'Cell is not initialized', the cell
has not been activated. If attribute information about the cell is displayed, the cell has
already been in service.

2-13

User Manual
M900/M1800 Base Transceiver Station (BTS30)

BTS Maintenance
Chapter 2 Fault Analysis and Location

2) For the cell that has not been activated, reset the site that the cell belongs to.
Please note that this will affect the conversation of other cells under the site.
During the initialization, the progress indication of respective stages of the
initialization will be displayed.
Base station initialization is embodied by the initialization of site and cell.
Site initialization procedures:
z

Set site logic object

Set site hardware object

Set site extended attributes

Establish multi-point connection

Site activation

Cell initialization procedures:


z

Create TEI

Establish signaling channel connection

Create traffic channel connection

Set cell attributes

Set cell extended attributes

Set RC attributes

Set RC extended attributes

Set channel attributes

Set cell alarm threshold

Cell activation

Wait for the cell status change report

The result of these two types of initialization will be displayed at the maintenance
console in real time. If the operation succeeds, a solid star will be displayed. If the
operation fails, a hollow star along with the causes of failure will be displayed.
If there is any data error in the initialization, check the corresponding data
configuration.
If the initialization can not be executed, there is a configuration error in the board
corresponding to the main control board of the base station. Check the board and
return to Step 1).
3) If the cell has already been in service, check whether the clock signal of the cell
and TRX board corresponding to BCCH are normal. If they are not, please take
corresponding measures.
How to check:
Select [Equipment Status Query] at the maintenance console to view the board
status.
2-14

User Manual
M900/M1800 Base Transceiver Station (BTS30)

BTS Maintenance
Chapter 2 Fault Analysis and Location

If the icon of the board is red, the board is abnormal. In this case, check whether the
hardware of the base station, the communication between TRX and TMU, and
whether each board is normally powered on.
4) If the MS is a dual band one, but forcedly set to single band mode, change back
into dual band mode.
5) If the MS is improperly set, restore the ex-factory default setting.

2.2.3 MS Frequent Location Updating


I. Fault Description
When powered on, the MS can locate the network and make/receive calls. But the
voice quality is poor because the MS updates its location frequently.

II. Fault Analysis and Location


Location update of an MS takes place when:
1) It is moved into a new location area.
2) It is time for a regular location update.
3) It is powered on.
Frequent location updating usually results from improper data configuration.

III. Troubleshooting Procedure


1) Check the interface signaling. If 'Normal location updating', then the MS may be
located on the edge of a boundary area where multiple location areas are overlapped
(which is a rare case). Please try to move the MS forward to any direction.
2) If the interface message 'IMSI ATTACH' appears frequently, and the MS is not
powered on and off frequently, check whether the MS RXLEV is so low that the MS
fails to receive base station messages and is thus disconnected from the network.
3) If frequent MS location updating is periodical, then the system message may be
abnormal and the location updating period may be set too short. Please check
whether the MS receives system message (T3212) correctly. Modify the value of
T3212 in the system message.
Check if the location area codes in different system messages are consistent.

2-15

User Manual
M900/M1800 Base Transceiver Station (BTS30)

BTS Maintenance
Chapter 2 Fault Analysis and Location

2.3 Loading Fault


2.3.1 Software Loading Failure
I. Fault Description
If software fails to be loaded to the base station, and the interface does not prompt on
the successful completion of software loading, it indicates that the software of the new
version is not loaded to the base station.

II. Introduction to Software Loading


In BS software loading, the specified software is loaded to the base station through a
remote maintenance console or the local MMI to upgrade the software of the base
station.
Files that can be loaded and activated are the ones named in the format of *.bin. The
loading of TRX software is actually the loading of 7 files that are bundled together.
TMU uses OM software.
The interface of software loading is shown in Figure 2-2:

Figure 2-2 [SW Download] interface


In this interface, set all items of the software to be loaded, including file name,
sending window size, version, and file ID (file type), and then click <Begin> to start
the loading

2-16

User Manual
M900/M1800 Base Transceiver Station (BTS30)

BTS Maintenance
Chapter 2 Fault Analysis and Location

Caution:
The software loaded will not take effect until it is activated.

Interface description:
[File ID]: Identifier of various types of board software of the base station. Software No.
varies with the types of boards. The file ID must match with the software. TRX_MAIN
is the running software for TRX, and TMU_MAIN that of TMU.
[Version]: Identifies the software of different versions for the same type of boards.
[File Name]: The path and file name of the file loaded.
[Send Window Size]: The number of frames of the messages sent by TMU between
two responses. Generally it can be set as 49.
After the software is successfully loaded, the interface of software loading will be as
shown in Figure 2-3. The prompt 'Load SW successfully' will be displayed in the
message bar at the bottom of the interface [SW Download].
If the loading does not proceed as described above, it is not successful.

Figure 2-3 Load SW successfully

III. Fault Analysis and Location


1) Check the channel for the software loading.

2-17

User Manual
M900/M1800 Base Transceiver Station (BTS30)

BTS Maintenance
Chapter 2 Fault Analysis and Location

If the software is loaded via a local MMI, check whether the serial port connection is
normal.
If the software is loaded via a remote maintenance console, check whether the
network connection is normal, and whether E1 line connection is correct.
2) Check whether the management authority is correct. If it is loaded at a local end,
the management authority should be obtained at the local end. If it is loaded remotely,
the management authority should be released at the local end.
3) Confirm whether the selection of software type is correct. For example, if the
loaded software is TRX software, but the selected software type is not TRX_MAIN,
then the loading will fail.

IV. Troubleshooting Procedure


1) Make sure that the line connection is normal.
2) Make sure that the management authority is correctly set.
3) Make sure that the loaded software matches the selected type.
4) Make sure that the version No. of the loaded software is correct.

2.3.2 Base Station Initialization Failure


I. Fault Description
Base station initialization cannot be normally completed.

II. Introduction to Base Station Initialization


Base station initialization is embodied by the initialization of site and cell.
1) Site initialization procedures:
z

Set site logic object

Set site hardware object

Set site extended attributes

Establish multi-point connection

Site activation

2) Cell initialization procedures:


z

Create TEI

Establish signaling channel connection

Establish traffic channel connection

Set cell attributes

Set cell extended attributes

2-18

User Manual
M900/M1800 Base Transceiver Station (BTS30)
z

Set RC attributes

Set RC extended attributes

Set channel attributes

Set cell alarm threshold

Cell activation

BTS Maintenance
Chapter 2 Fault Analysis and Location

Corresponding commands or data configuration is sent to the base station during


different stages of the initialization.

III. Fault Analysis and Location


For site initialization error, check the corresponding data configuration, the TMU
board and the maintenance link.
For cell initialization error, check the corresponding data configuration, the TMU board,
the maintenance link and the corresponding board.
Check if the bit error rate on the transmission cable is too high or if there is any
transmission fault.

IV. Troubleshooting Procedure


1) Check the corresponding data configuration step by step according to the
erroneous initialization. Correct errors if there is any.
2) Check if the corresponding boards and the maintenance links are normal.
3) Check if the maintenance link are blocked.
Listed below is an explanation of the prompts on initialization errors:
a. 'Data configuration error' and 'Message does not match the physical configuration':
there are errors in the data configuration of BSC data management console. Please
check the corresponding data configuration.
b. 'Communication timeout': BTS does not respond within the specified time. After this
prompt appears, BSC will re-send the message. If the fault repeats, the transmission
link between BSC and BTS is disconnected or a fatal error has occurred to the TMU
of BTS.
c. 'Message structure error', 'Message type error', 'Illegal object type', 'Unsupported
object type', 'BTS No. error', 'TRX No. error', 'Illegal attribute ID', 'Unsupported
attribute', and 'Parameter exceeds the boundary': there are errors with the commands
sent by BSC, which may be caused by BSC fault. The problem 'Parameter exceeds
the boundary' may possibly be caused by incorrect data configuration.

2-19

User Manual
M900/M1800 Base Transceiver Station (BTS30)

BTS Maintenance
Chapter 2 Fault Analysis and Location

2.4 Signaling Fault


2.4.1 OML Link Blocked
I. Fault Description
While querying the corresponding maintenance link from BSC maintenance console,
it is detected that the signaling link status corresponding to OML link is not in
multi-frame link-setup state.

II. ntroduction to OML


OML link is the link for maintenance message between BSC and BTS.

III. Fault Analysis and Location


1) Check the status of the corresponding link.
2) Check whether the corresponding data configuration is correct.
3) Check whether the corresponding LAPD board is in normal position.
4) Check whether the BIE board of BSC are in normal position, whether the
corresponding E1 line and HW line are well connected, whether the status of the
corresponding E1 port of BIE board is normal.
5) Check whether the status of TMU board of the base station is normal.

IV. Troubleshooting Procedure


1) If the corresponding OML link is in 'TEI unallocated' status, first check whether the
corresponding data configuration is correct.
2) Check whether the corresponding data configuration is correct and consistent with
hardware configuration.
3) Check whether LAPD board is in normal position.
4) Check whether the corresponding BIE board status is correct, and whether HW line
and E1 line of the board are connected properly. If the corresponding E1 port status is
abnormal, HW line or E1 line might be wrongly connected.
5) Check whether the status of BIE board of the base station is correct.

2-20

User Manual
M900/M1800 Base Transceiver Station (BTS30)

BTS Maintenance
Chapter 2 Fault Analysis and Location

2.4.2 RSL Link Blocked


I. Fault Description
While querying the corresponding signaling link via the BSC maintenance console, it
is detected that the link is not in multi-frame link-setup state.

II. Introduction to RSL Link


RSL link is the channel for signaling message between TRX and BSC.

III. Fault Analysis and Location


1) Check the status of the corresponding signaling link. If it is not in multi-frame
link-setup state, specify what status it is in.
2) Check whether the corresponding data configuration of the link is correct.
3) Check the BIE board of BSC to see whether the corresponding E1 line and HW
line are well connected, and whether their status is normal.
4) Check whether the status of TMU board of BTS is normal.
5) Check whether the software of the cell is activated.
6) Check whether TRX board works normally.
7) Check whether the 900M/1800M attributes of TRX are correct.

IV. Troubleshooting Procedure


1) If links are in 'TEI unallocated' status, check whether the data of the corresponding
link are configured correctly.
2) If the link is in disconnected status, please check whether the data of the
corresponding link matches the configuration of the hardware. If not, adjust either the
data configuration or the hardware configuration to make them match.
3) Check the status of the BIE board of BSC. Check whether E1 line and HW line are
well connected. If not, please connect them properly, and then recheck whether the
corresponding status recovers normal.
4) Check whether the corresponding LAPD board is in right location, and whether its
status is normal, and whether other links have been established.
5) Check whether TMU board status to see if it is normal.
6) Check whether the software of the cell is activated, whether it is in normal running.
7) Make sure that 900M /1800M TRX is inserted in a proper slot.
2-21

User Manual
M900/M1800 Base Transceiver Station (BTS30)

BTS Maintenance
Chapter 2 Fault Analysis and Location

8) Check whether the connector on the BTS cabinet top is well inserted.

2.5 Antenna and Feeder System Fault


I. Fault Description
The uplink and downlink signals detected are inconsistent with the standard
parameters.

II. Introduction to the Antenna and Feeder System


The antenna and feeder system is used to provide duplex radio channels between
MS and BTS.
A radio channel from BTS to MS is defined as a downlink channel, while one from MS
to BTS an uplink channel.

III. Fault Analysis and Location


1) Poor downlink signal
2) Unstable downlink signal
3) Poor uplink signal

IV. Troubleshooting Procedure


Poor downlink signal
1) Check whether the output of TRX OUT port on TRX module (including power
amplifier) is normal. If not, replace TRX module.
2) Check whether the output of TX/RX_ANT port on CDU module is normal. If not,
replace the CDU

Caution:
The prerequisite to the above procedures is that the transmit cable from TRX to CDU is not faulty.

3) Test the antenna VSWR (voltage standing wave ratio) from 1/2 jumper connector
connected with TX/RX_ANT port of CDU module. If it is normal, check the pitch angle
of the antenna and adjust it to an appropriate angle.

2-22

User Manual
M900/M1800 Base Transceiver Station (BTS30)

BTS Maintenance
Chapter 2 Fault Analysis and Location

4) If the VSWR at testing antenna end, tested from 1/2" jumper connector, is
abnormal, check section by section the VSWRs of respective connection ports of the
connecting cable (including tower-top amplifier, lightning arrester) between this port
and the transmitting antenna till the causes that worsen the VSWR are found. The
causes may be poor connection of connectors, water leakage due to poor
waterproofing of connectors, high VSWR of the antenna and feeder lightning arrester,
high VSWR and water penetration of the antenna etc. Then take corresponding
measures to clear the fault according to the different causes.
Unstable downlink signal
1) Check whether the output (PA OUT port) of TRX module (including power amplifier)
is stable. If not, replace the TRX module.
2) Check whether the outdoor antenna and feeder system is reliable, and make sure
that the antenna and feeder do not sway with wind too much.
Poor uplink signal
1) Check whether CDU has tower-top amplifier alarm (TTA). If so, replace the
tower-top amplifier. CDU tower-top amplifier alarm can be obtained by viewing the
panel indicator and the alarm report from the operation and maintenance console.
2) Check whether CDU LNA gives alarm. If so, replace the CDU module.
3) Check whether the connecting cable from input port TX/RX_ANT of CDU antenna
to the top of cabinet is normal. If not, replace the cable.
4) Test the VSWR of antenna and feeder from the top of the cabinet, the procedure is
the same as that in step 4 in I (Poor downlink signal).

2.6 Optical Channel Fault


I. Fault Description
Optical channel alarm and transmission fault.

II. Fault Analysis and Location


This fault may be caused by:
1) Fault of the receiving and transmitting optical channel.
2) Loss of 2M analog signals, 2M interface external clock or 2M line signals, or 2M
signal alarm.
3) Loss of 2M interface transmitting clock or 2M interface digital signals.
4) Fault of TEU-TES communication.
2-23

User Manual
M900/M1800 Base Transceiver Station (BTS30)

BTS Maintenance
Chapter 2 Fault Analysis and Location

III. Troubleshooting Procedure


1) Check the optical channel between ASU and BSC.
2) Check the E1 wiring of ASU.
3) Check ASU board.
4) Check TES and TEU.

2.7 Board Fault


2.7.1 CDU
I. Sources of Fault Information
TMU fault can be detected from the information gathered from:
1) The alarm box
2) The alarm console
3) CDU indicator status
4) Hardware configuration status panel of the maintenance console

II. Fault Classification


1) High VSWR 1 (VSWR1) alarm
2) High VSWR 2 (VSWR2) alarm
3) Tower-top amplifier (TTA) alarm
4) Low noise amplifier (LNA) alarm

III. Troubleshooting Procedure


Clear the fault step by step as instructed.
High standing wave ratio alarm 1 (VSWR1)
1) Use a test mobile station to check if the antenna feeder system of the base station
can receive and transmit signals properly.
Y Reset the CDU with the force resetting function of the alarm control unit and see
whether the reported alarm is false.

2-24

User Manual
M900/M1800 Base Transceiver Station (BTS30)

BTS Maintenance
Chapter 2 Fault Analysis and Location

If the signal is intermittent or cannot be transmitted at all, the antenna and feeder
system may be faulty. Check the antenna and feeder system. If the fault is caused by
the loose contact of the feeder, proceed with Step 2).
2) Test the voltage standing wave ratio of the outdoor antenna feeder system. Check
if it is faulty, and determine whether replacement is necessary on the parts of antenna
feeder.
Below are the instructions on the testing of the outdoor antenna and feeder system:
a. Start the check from the 1/2 inch jumper connector that is joined to the TX/RX ANT
port of CDU. Check if there is any loose contact with the connector.
b. Check if there is a tower top amplifier. If yes, power off the amplifier before further
test to prevent short circuiting or other accidents that may damage the instruments.
c. Check the VWSR at the 1/2 inch connector that is joint to the TX/RX ANT port of
CDU. If the VWSR is not stable, check section by section the connection between the
TX/RX ANT port and the sending end of the antenna (including the tower top amplifier
and the lightening arrester) to locate the cause to the unstableness of VWSR.
Normally, unstable VWSR may be caused by improper installation, improper
encapsulation that causes water inflow, high feeder system lightening arrester VWSR,
high antenna VWSR or water inflow of the antenna.
Take corresponding measures to eliminate faults.
3) If the CDU is found faulty, replace it.
High standing wave ratio alarm 2 (VSWR2)
1) CDU reports alarm to the Background when VSWR2 occurs, and reports critical
VSWR2 alarm to the Background if the alarm lasts for more than one minute.
The operation and maintenance unit, after receiving the VSWR2 alarm, sends a
command to the TRX to switch off transmitting excitation.
2) Locate the cause of the fault. Repeat Step 2) of the last section 'I.

High standing

wave ratio alarm 1 (VSWR1)'.


3) If the fault is not yet located at this point, enable TRX transmitting excitation and
repeat Step 1) of the last section I. High standing wave ratio alarm 1 (VSWR1).
4) Replace the CDU.
Tower-top Amplifier (TTA) Alarm
1) Disconnect the jumper from the antenna port, and test the antenna and feeder
system with a multi-meter. Power on the CDU, and test whether the input voltage is
normal. If not, the CDU is faulty. In this case, replace the CDU.

2-25

User Manual
M900/M1800 Base Transceiver Station (BTS30)

BTS Maintenance
Chapter 2 Fault Analysis and Location

2) Disconnect the jumper from the antenna port, and tandem the ammeter in the
circuit. Power on the tower top amplifier, and check:
z

Whether the input voltage is as desired

Whether the input current is within the range desired

If the input voltage is normal, but the input current is zero, the TTA may be in bypass
status and is faulty. In this case, replace the TTA.
3) Replace the CDU.
Low noise amplifier (LNA) alarm
1) Test the gain from the testing coupling port to RX output port of this channel to see
whether it is normal. If not, replace the CDU.
2) Reset the CDU with the force resetting function of the alarm control unit.
Execute the force resetting command from the Background to the CDU, and check
whether the indication of CDU indicators. Is CDU alarm reported again? If not, the
alarm reported formerly may be false.
3) If the CDU is confirmed to be faulty, replace it.

2.7.2 EDU
I. Sources of Fault Information
The fault of EDU can be detected with the information gathered from:
z

The alarm box

The alarm information at the alarm console

Status of EDU indicators

Hardware configuration status at the maintenance console panel

II. Fault Classification


z

VSWRA alarm

VSWRB alarm

TTA alarm

LNA alarm

III. Troubleshooting Procedure


Clear the fault step by step as instructed.
High standing wave ratio alarm A (VSWRA)
1) When VSWRA occurs to EDU, EDU will report the alarm to TMU. When this alarm
lasts one minute, CDU will report a critical SWR alarm to TMU; After the TMU

2-26

User Manual
M900/M1800 Base Transceiver Station (BTS30)

BTS Maintenance
Chapter 2 Fault Analysis and Location

receives this report, it will automatically send a command to the TRX to switch off
transmitting excitation
2) Test to see if the said CDU has transmitting power. If not, go to Step 4); if so, (the
TMU does not switch off transmitting excitation), got to Step 3).
3) Use a test mobile station to check if the antenna feeder system of the base station
can receive and transmit signals properly.
Y Check whether the reported alarm is false by manually resetting the CDU. If the
alarm is false, proceed with Step 5).
N There might be fault with the antenna feeder transmission system.
4) Test the standing wave ratio of the outdoor antenna feeder system to determine
whether it is faulty and whether parts of the antenna feeder system should be
replaced.
Below are the instructions:
z

Shake the 1/4-inch jumper and 1/2-inch jumper on top of the cabinet connected
with TX/RX_ANT port of EDU, and see if their VSWR is stable.

Test the VSWR at the 1/4-inch jumper connector connected with TX/RX_ANT
port of EDU, and shake the 1/4-inch jumper and the 1/2-inch jumper on top of the
cabinet to see if the VSWR changes noticeably.

When the VSWR is less than 1.3:1, the VSWR of the antenna feeder system is
regarded as normal. When the VSWR is greater than 1.4:1 or the cable is not
correctly connected, you may initially conclude that the antenna feeder system is
faulty. Adopt the method of antenna feeder system replacement to further make
sure if the system is faulty. When this method fails, go to Step 5). If this step
shows the antenna feeder system is faulty, please deal with fault in the way of
checking the fault of the antenna feeder system.

Caution:
If a tower top amplifier is installed on the feeder line, cut off the power supply of the TTA, and test if the
SWR of EDU TX/RX_ANT port exceeds the standard by a large degree.

5) Check if the EDU is faulty


z

Test to see if the VSWR of EDU TX/RX_ANT port is more than 2.5:1, which is
seriously beyond the standard.

2-27

User Manual
M900/M1800 Base Transceiver Station (BTS30)
z

BTS Maintenance
Chapter 2 Fault Analysis and Location

Check whether the VSWR alarm processing function of EDU is abnormal. First
reset EDU and power it on again. If after this the alarm is not reported again, the
EDU may be faulty. In this case, replace the EDU to see if it is indeed faulty.

6) If the EDU is confirmed to be faulty, replace it.


Standing wave ratio alarm B (VSWRB)
The removal process of this alarm is similar to that of VSWRA.3. Top-tower amplifier
alarm (TTA).
1) Reset EDU to see if the TTA alarm disappears. If not, the reported alarm is false. In
this case, replace the EDU If the alarm disappears, go to Step 2).
2) Disconnect EDU antenna port with the 1/4-inch jumper. Use a multimeter to check
if there is any short-circuiting. If yes, it indicates the antenna feeder system is faulty,
and it is necessary to check the feeder line, jumper and tower amplifier to locate the
short-circuiting (e.g. those caused by water inflow).
3) Switch on EDU TTA feeding power, and see if TTA alarm occurs to the EDU. If so,
it indicates that EDU voltage output is normal (the alarm arises from the shortage
alarm of TTA current, which shuts down the voltage. This is normal).
4) Connect a ammeter in series between the antenna port of the EDU and the
1/4-inch jumper. Please be sure to keep good electric contact between the external
conductor of EDU antenna port and the external conductor of the 1/4-inch jumper.
Switch on the feeding power of tower amplifier and measure whether the feeding
voltage is accurate (12V) and see if the current of the feeding power of tower top
amplifier stays within the normal work current range of the tower amplifier selected. If
the voltage is normal but the current is zero, it indicates the tower top amplifier is in a
state of bypass, the tower amplifier has been damaged and thus requires replacing.

Note:
When the conditions for taking this step are not satisfied, an EDU without its tower top amplifier working
properly to check if the antenna feeder system that the EDU with alarm fault corresponds to is normal.
Here are the instructions:
1) Power off this EDU and disconnect the jumper from it.
2) Connect the jumper of the antenna feeder system to the antenna port of the EDU that works properly.
3) Power on the EDU as well as the tower top amplifier feeding (TCP), and see if alarm is reported on
the EDU tower top amplifier. If yes, the tower amplifier is faulty.

5) Check each part of the antenna feeder system to locate the fault. If the tower top
amplifier is still faulty, replace it.

2-28

User Manual
M900/M1800 Base Transceiver Station (BTS30)

BTS Maintenance
Chapter 2 Fault Analysis and Location

Low noise amplifier alarm (LNA)


1) Test the gain from the testing coupling port to RX output port of this channel to see
whether it is normal. If not, replace the EDU.
2) Utilize the forced reset function of EDU alarm control unit.
3) Manually reset the EDU on the terminal maintenance console, and check if the
EDU indicator works properly to determine whether the reported alarm is false.
4) When EDU fault is located, replace the EDU.

2.7.3 PBU
I. Sources of Fault Information
z

Alarm box

View alarm console information

Observe the status of PBU indicator

View hardware configuration status of maintenance console panel

II. Fault Classification


z

High voltage standing-wave ratio alarm

Over temperature alarm

Under power alarm

Board communication alarm

Flash memory alarm

EPLD load times alarm

EPLD upgrade failure alarm

Master clock alarm

Slave clock alarm

Clock critical alarm

III. Troubleshooting Procedure


Clear the fault step by step as instructed.
PBU high voltage standing wave ratio alarm
1) Check the connecting cable and connection input from PBU to CDU.
2) Reset PBU.
3) If the alarm continues, replace this PBU.
PBU over temperature alarm
1) Check the equipment temperature and environment control equipment.

2-29

User Manual
M900/M1800 Base Transceiver Station (BTS30)

BTS Maintenance
Chapter 2 Fault Analysis and Location

2) Check the operation of rack fans.


3) If all the temperature control equipment works properly, replace this PBU module.
PBU under power alarm
1) Restart the equipment to see if it can be restored.
2) If it cannot be restored, replace the said PBU module.
PBU board communication alarm
1) Check if PBU is powered on.
2) Replace PBU.
PBU Flash memory alarm
1) Replace Flash memory.
2) Replace PBU.
EPLD load times alarm
If the EPLD is erased for times more than the threshold (100 times), this alarm will
arise.
PBU EPLD upgrade failure alarm
If EPLD in Flash upgrade software fails to be loaded for three times consecutively,
this alarm will occur.
PBU master clock alarm
1) Check TMU clock.
2) Check clock transmission line.
3) Check TDU.
4) View if extended TMU is installed.
PBU slave clock alarm
1) TMU clock.
2) Check the clock transmission line.
3) Check TDU.
4) View if extended TMU is installed.
PBU clock critical alarm
1) Check active and standby clock transmission line.

2-30

User Manual
M900/M1800 Base Transceiver Station (BTS30)

BTS Maintenance
Chapter 2 Fault Analysis and Location

2) Check active and standby clock.


3) Replace PBU unit.

2.7.4 PMU
I. Sources of Fault Information
1) PMU indicator status
2) Hardware status display panel on the maintenance console

II. Related Function Units


PMU, power frame backplane distribution line, power module PSU, sensor and its
circuitry, battery pack loop.

III. Fault Classification


1) Board power-off
2) Power supply system alarm

IV. Troubleshooting Procedure


Board power-off
In this case, the indicator RUN on PMU board is off, the board does not work, and
remote treatment becomes impossible.
First check whether PSU is switched on, and whether VOUT indicator is on. If the
indicator is off, then there must be no PSU voltage output. If VOUT indicator is on,
measure whether the output voltage is normal. If it does not fall within the operating
voltage range, then PSU power supply is abnormal. If it is normal, check whether
PMU is properly inserted. If the problem still exists, replace the PMU board.
Power supply system alarm
In this case, the ALM system alarm indicator on PMU panel is on. It indicates that
there are faults in the power supply system. These faults can be viewed via the base
station maintenance console and they may be power module alarm, power
distribution alarm, and environment alarm.
1)

Power module alarm

Power module fault

First check whether the input voltage and output voltage of the power frame fall within
the operating range. If they do not, check the input power supply and output load. If
they are normal, pull out the faulty power module from the backplane according to the
2-31

User Manual
M900/M1800 Base Transceiver Station (BTS30)

BTS Maintenance
Chapter 2 Fault Analysis and Location

alarm power module address prompted in the base station maintenance console.
Then re-insert when all indicators are off. View the base station maintenance console
for any module fault alarm. If there is no fault alarm, then the power module has
recovered and can be put into use again. If the alarm reoccurs, replace the faulty
power module.
z

Power module protection

The cause is that the power module input voltage exceeds the operating range or the
operating temperature is too high. Check whether there is any over/under-voltage in
the input power supply. If it is abnormal, repair the input power supply. If it is normal,
check whether the operating temperature of the power module is too high or whether
the cooling fan is faulty. If all the above are normal, pull out the power protection
module from the backplane according to the alarm power module address prompted
in the base station maintenance console. Reinsert the module when all indicators are
off. View the base station maintenance console for any module protection alarm. If
there is no alarm, then the power module has recovered and can be put into use
again. If the alarm reoccurs, replace the power protection module.
z

Power module communication failure

Check whether PMU and PSU are well inserted. If they are properly installed and of
good contact, check via the base station maintenance console to see whether the
power module quantity and the data configuration of each module address are correct.
If correct, check whether all the inserted modules fail in communication. If all fail in
communication and yet it is not sure whether the PMU is normal, replace the PMU. If
PMU is confirmed to be normal, replace power frame backplane. If communication
failure only occurs to some modules, interchange the positions of the power modules
of successful communication with those of communication failure. If the modules that
previously failed in communication still fail in communication, replace the power
module PSU. If the power module of successful communication fails in
communication after the interchange, replace the power frame backplane.
2)

Power distribution alarm

AC input power-off or AC input over/under-voltage

In DC/DC power supply system, check whether module communication is successful.


If all fail in communication, refer to Subsection c (Power Module Communication
Failure) in Section 1) for solutions. When no power module is installed, check via the
base station maintenance console to see whether module quantity is set as 0. Check
the AC input distribution in AC/DC power supply system. If the distribution wires are
normal and AC input voltage is normal as well, check whether the PMU is well
inserted. If it is properly installed and of good contact, first consider replacing the
PMU. If AC input power-off alarm still exists, replace the power supply backplane.
z

DC output over/under-voltage

2-32

User Manual
M900/M1800 Base Transceiver Station (BTS30)

BTS Maintenance
Chapter 2 Fault Analysis and Location

View the busbar voltage via the base station maintenance console and compare it
with the actual voltage. If the over/under-voltage is caused by measurement error,
check whether the PMU is well inserted. If it is properly installed and of good contact,
consider replacing the PMU. If the measurement is made correctly, check when there
is DC over-voltage alarm whether the power module or power supply input or power
load is abnormal. When there is DC under-voltage alarm, check whether the AC input,
power module or power supply input, and power load are abnormal.
z

Battery powered off

If the conditions for batteries being powered off are met, the monitoring module
should stop working and no battery powered off alarm should be detected due to
single power supply mode. Check whether the power-off contactor is working.
Replace it if it is not working.
z

Battery fuse broken

Check whether the battery loop fuse, contactor and wiring are normal. If no problem is
found with the wiring of the battery loop and devices, check whether the PMU is well
inserted. If it is properly installed and of good contact, replace the PMU.
z

System output voltage abnormal

There is wide differences between the busbar voltage and the specified output
voltage. If it is a DC/DC system, the problem may come from the power module or the
load. Check whether the power module and the load are abnormal. If it is an AC/DC
system, the problem may come from battery pack temperature compensation, power
module fault or the load. Check via the base station maintenance console to see
whether the measured value of the battery pack temperature is correct. If the value is
correct, do calculation using the following formula:
Temperature compensation voltage = floating charge voltage (battery pack
temperature - 25) * temperature compensation coefficient
If the battery pack compensation voltage and busbar output voltage calculated
deviate within the error range (0.3V), then it is normal. If the deviation is too big,
check whether the power module and the load are abnormal. If the temperature
sensor measurement value is incorrect and there is no battery pack temperature
sensor attached, check whether the PMU is well inserted. If it is properly installed and
of good contact, replace the PMU. When there is a battery pack temperature sensor
attached, remove the temperature sensor. And if the measured temperature value is
the default value 25 C, then the temperature sensor must be defective. Replace the
battery pack temperature sensor. If the measured temperature value of the battery
pack is not the default value, the PMU temperature measurement circuit may be faulty.
Replace the PMU.
3)

Environment alarm

Ultra high/low ambient temperature or humidity

2-33

User Manual
M900/M1800 Base Transceiver Station (BTS30)

BTS Maintenance
Chapter 2 Fault Analysis and Location

When installing temperature/humidity sensor, check via the base station maintenance
console to see whether the measured value is consistent with the actual value. If it is,
tackle the environment problem. If the alarm is caused by incorrect measurement,
check whether the PMU is well inserted. If it is properly installed and of good contact,
replace the sensor first. If the measurement remains inaccurate, replace the PMU. If
no temperature/humidity sensor is installed, check whether the PMU is well inserted.
If it is properly installed and of good contact, replace the PMU.
z

Smoke alarm, infrared alarm and soaking alarm

Check whether the PMU is well inserted. If it is properly installed and of good contact,
check whether there is any environmental alarm on the site mentioned above. If there
is any such alarm clear it. If there is no such alarm, check whether there is any fault in
the sensor and its line. If the sensor and its line are normal, replace the PMU.
z

Door control alarm

Check whether PMU is well inserted. If it is properly installed and of good contact,
and no door control sensor is installed, check whether there is short-circuit jumper
connector in the door control sensor interface MC on the power supply backplane. If
there is not, install short circuit jumper connector. If there is, replace the PMU. If door
control sensor has been installed, check the site for any environmental alarm
mentioned above. If such alarm exists, solve the on-site environment problem. If there
is no such alarm, check whether the sensor and its line are faulty. If they are normal,
replace the PMU.
z

Fan alarm

Check whether PMU is well inserted. If it is well installed and of good contact, check
whether the rack feature No. configured in the base station maintenance console is
correct. If it is, check whether the fan fault signal input connector has been installed in
the fan port of the power supply backplane. Install the connector if it is not installed. If
there is a line fault, solve the problem of fan fault signal input line. If everything is
normal, replace the PMU.

2.7.5 PSU
I. Sources of Fault Information
1) Alarm box
2) Alarm console
3) PSU indicator status
4) Hardware configuration status panel of the maintenance console

2-34

User Manual
M900/M1800 Base Transceiver Station (BTS30)

BTS Maintenance
Chapter 2 Fault Analysis and Location

II. Fault Classification


1) Power supply alarm
2) Proper power supply unavailable

III. Troubleshooting Procedure


Clear the fault step by step as instructed.
Under normal conditions, the two green indicators on the power module are on
simultaneously, and the red indicator is off.

Note:

When system output load is small, individual modules may not work (i.e., the VO indicator is off) due to
current equalization. Yet it should not be considered as a fault.

If the green input indicator (VIN) of the power module is on, while the green
output indicator (VO) is off or flashing, check as instructed below
1) Check whether the faulty module is well installed, and whether the two fasteners at
the upper and lower sides of the panel are tightly screwed. If not, reinstall the module
following the specified module assembly procedure.
2) Check whether the system fan is running normally. If it is not running, turn on the
fan.
3) When the fan is running normally, and the green output indicator (VO) remains off,
then it may be that the module has not yet received the PMU voltage regulation signal.
Please wait for half a minute and observe.
4) If the green output indicator (VO) remains off after the above steps, this module
must be faulty.
If none of the three indicators on the module are on, check as instructed below
1) Check the status of other power module indicators in the same system. If all of
them are off, check whether the power supply system input busbar (or connector post)
is live or whether the connection is loose. If any problem is found, reconnect the input
line.
2) If one or module indicators are on or it is sure the power system input busbar is live,
check whether the module is properly installed and whether the two fasteners at the

2-35

User Manual
M900/M1800 Base Transceiver Station (BTS30)

BTS Maintenance
Chapter 2 Fault Analysis and Location

upper and lower sides of the panel are tightly screwed. If not, reinstall the module
following the specified module assembly procedure.
3) If the indicator remains off after the above steps, this module must be faulty.
4) If the green input indicator (VIN) and red indicator (ALM) on the module panel are
off while the green output indicator (VO) is on, it means that the module itself can
normally output power supply. Please make replacement if spares are available. If no
spares are available, this module can still work as before and normal power supply
function will not be affected.
If the red alarm indicator (ALM) on the module panel is on while the green
output indicator (VO) is off, check as instructed below
1) Check the system monitoring for any input over/under-voltage alarms. If such
alarm is found, then it is normal that the red indicator (ALM) is on. When the input
voltage resumes normal, the module will also resume its normal operation.
2) If the input voltage is normal, check whether the cooling fan of the system cabinet
has stopped running. When the fan has stopped for a long time, over temperature
protection will occur to the module. Pull out the alarm module according to the power
module replacement procedure. Detach the module from the power system and
reinsert it into the power supply system frame a few minutes later when it is cooled.
Then the module should work normally, otherwise it must be faulty and replacement is
needed.

2.7.6 TES
I. Sources of Fault Information
1) Alarm console
2) TES indicator status
3) Hardware configuration status panel of the maintenance console

II. Related Functional Units


TMU, TEU, CDU

III. Fault Classification


1) Board powered off
2) Board communication alarm

2-36

User Manual
M900/M1800 Base Transceiver Station (BTS30)

BTS Maintenance
Chapter 2 Fault Analysis and Location

IV. Troubleshooting Procedure


Board powered off
In this case, the PWR power indicator on TES board is off. The board does not work
and remote treatment becomes impossible.
First check whether PSU is switched on and whether VOUT indicator is on. If the
indicator is not on, it means that there is no PSU voltage output. Then check whether
the TES power switch of the switch box on top of the cabinet is shut on. If they are all
normal, check whether the TES is properly inserted and whether the power cable of
the backplane is well connected. If the problem still exists, replace the TES board.
Board communication alarm
In this case, the ALM indicator on TES panel is on, indicating that a communication
fault has occurred to the serial port between TES and TEU, and the serial port
between the two boards is blocked.
First replace the TES board. If the communication alarm does not disappear, replace
the TEU board. If the alarm still exists, replace the CMB backplane.

2.7.7 TEU
I. Sources of Fault Information
1) Alarm console
2) TEU indicator status
3) Hardware configuration status panel of the base station maintenance console

II. Related Functional Units


PSU, TES, TMU, Transmission line and E1 line.

III. Fault Classification


1) Board power-off
2) Transmission line alarm
3) E1 link alarm
4) Calls can not be put through

IV. Troubleshooting Procedure


Board power-off
2-37

User Manual
M900/M1800 Base Transceiver Station (BTS30)

BTS Maintenance
Chapter 2 Fault Analysis and Location

In this case, all indicators on TEU board are off and the board does not work.
First check whether PSU is switched on, and whether VOUT indicator is on. If VOUT
indicator is not on, it means that there is no PSU voltage output. Then check whether
the TES power switch of the switch box on top of the cabinet is on, and then whether
the PWR indicator of the TES board is on. If they are all normal, check whether TEU
is properly inserted. If the problem still exists, replace the TEU board.
When the TEU is used for the optical transmission system, it is a public resource of
the whole network. If the transmission is interrupted due to improper operation,
serious consequences will arise. Therefore, TEU power-off operation must be done
with extreme caution.
Transmission line alarm
In this case, the RUN indicator on TEU panel will indicate fault. For details, refer to
the instructions of various interface boards.
Seen from the OMC, transmission line alarm breaks up into transmission line
receiving alarm and transmission line sending alarm. Transmission line receiving
alarm means that all receiving lines of the board are blocked. Please check the
receiving lines.
Transmission line sending alarm means that all sending lines of the board are blocked.
Please check the sending lines.
E1 link Alarm
1)

Off-board E1 alarm

This alarm means that faults have occurred to the E1 line. Check whether the E1 line
connectors are in good contact. E1 line transmits in 75 and 120 resistance
respectively. Check whether the setting of board toggle switch is correct. The default
value of the board is 75. Directly connect the receiving end and sending end of the
port using a 75 coaxial cable to determine whether the board is faulty. If any alarm
occurs, it can be determined that the TEU board is faulty. Please replace the board.
2)

Intra-board E1 alarm

A fault has occurred within the board. Please replace the board.
Orderwire blocked
Check whether the board has 48V or 24V power supply input, i.e., whether the jumper
setting is correct (Jumpers of ASU and PAT are all set to 48V). Replace TEU board. If
the problem still exists, replace CMB backplane.

2-38

User Manual
M900/M1800 Base Transceiver Station (BTS30)

BTS Maintenance
Chapter 2 Fault Analysis and Location

2.7.8 TMU
I. Sources of Fault Information
TMU fault can be detected from the information gathered from:
1) The alarm box
2) The alarm console
3) TMU indicators
4) Hardware configuration status panel of the maintenance console

II. Related Functional Units


TRX, CDU, PSU, PMU and E1 lines.

III. Fault Classification


TMU fault may be caused by:
1) No power supply
2) System alarm
3) E1 link alarm
4) Clock is in holdover or free-run mode
5) 13M output clock is found to be inaccurate when tested with a frequency meter

IV. Troubleshooting Procedure


Board power-off
In this case, the PWR power indicator on TMU board is off, the board does not work
and remote treatment becomes impossible.
1) Check whether PSU is switched on and whether VOUT indicator is on. If the
indicator is off, it means there is no PSU voltage output.
2) Check whether the TMU power switch in the switch box on top of the cabinet is on.
3) Check whether the TMU is properly inserted and whether the power cable of the
backplane is well connected.
4) If the problem still exists, replace the TMU board.
System alarm
1) The remote maintenance console prompts on OML link fault
2-39

User Manual
M900/M1800 Base Transceiver Station (BTS30)

BTS Maintenance
Chapter 2 Fault Analysis and Location

First check whether CPU is normal, i.e., if the RUN indicator on TMU panel stops
flashing, CPU is abnormal.
If it is abnormal, replace the board and then check whether the E1 ports connected to
BSC are normal, i.e., if Indicators LI1, LI2, LI3 or LI4 on TMU panel are on or flashing,
it indicates that faults have occurred to the corresponding E1 ports.
If they are abnormal, refer to Section III 'E1 link alarm (including local alarm and
remote alarm)' to solve the problem and then check whether BSC data configuration
is correct.
If the problem still exists, replace the TMU.
2) The MMI maintenance console shows the fault of the boards or modules other than
TMU
First check whether the board reported to be faulty is really faulty.
Y Refer to relevant chapters or sections to solve the problem.
N There may be communication fault between TMU and this board. In this case,
solve the problem according to the following instructions:
a. Check BSC data configuration and the wiring of the backplane.
b. If the problem still exists, replace the TMU board or the board or module that is
reported to be faulty.
E1 link alarm (including local and remote alarm)
When some of the E1 ports are faulty, the line alarm indicators LI1, LI2, LI3 or LI4 on
the TMU board are on or flashing.
Fault of local E1 port is indicated with the above listed indicators on, while that of the
remote E1 ports, with these indicators flashing.
To clear this type of fault, first check whether data configuration and line connection
are correct.
For fault of local E1 port, check if the port reported to be faulty is configured and if the
E1 cables are connected.
For fault of E1 port that has been configured, connect the receiving and transmitting
terminals of the port with a 75 coaxial cable to determine whether the board is faulty.
If alarm appears, it may be a TMU fault. Then replace the TMU board.
If the site is configured as in cascading mode, check the data configuration relative to
the cascaded sites.
Clock is in free-run mode

2-40

User Manual
M900/M1800 Base Transceiver Station (BTS30)

BTS Maintenance
Chapter 2 Fault Analysis and Location

In this case, the PLL indicator on TMU panel is on.


The clock enters free-run mode due to poor stability or loss of upper level clock
reference signal.
Check whether the configured clock reference source is introduced by the E1 link or
form the external clock.
z

If the clock reference signal is introduced by the E1 link, check whether there is
E1 link alarm.

Y Refer to Section III, 'E1 link alarm (including local alarm and remote alarm)'.
N Test T2M clock on the panel.
If this clock is not very stable, there is fault with the upper level clock. Clear the fault
of the upper level clock and TMU will automatically switch to the locked mode.
z

If external clock is configured, check: 1) whether the wiring is correct, 2) whether


there is any external clock, 3) whether the external clock, if any, meets the
requirements.

Clear the fault of the upper level clock and TMU will switch to the locked mode
automatically.
13M output clock is found to be inaccurate when tested with a frequency meter
Possible causes of this cause include:
1) Upper level clock is not accurate enough.
2) TMU is damaged.
To clear this fault,
1) Check whether T2M signals on the TMU panel are faulty.
Y There is fault with the upper level clock. In this case, clear the upper level clock
fault.
Correct the time of the upper level clock, and then:
a. Set the 13M output clock in free-run mode.
b. Send user-defined command to the 13M output clock to adjust the time of it.
c. Check if the 13M output clock returns to normal.
d. If the 13M output clock fails to lock the right frequency within (about) 20 minutes,
replace the TMU board.

2-41

User Manual
M900/M1800 Base Transceiver Station (BTS30)

BTS Maintenance
Chapter 2 Fault Analysis and Location

2.7.9 TRX
I. Sources of Fault Information
1) Alarm box
2) Alarm console
3) TRX indicator status
4) Hardware configuration status panel of maintenance console

II. Fault Classification


1) Over standing-wave alarm
2) Power alarm
3) Temperature alarm
4) Clock alarm
5) Phase-locked loop alarm
6) DSP alarm
7) FPGA alarm
8) FIFO alarm
9) Frequency hopping bus alarm
10) DBUS bus alarm
11) Power supply alarm
12) TRX no power output

III. Troubleshooting Procedure


Clear the fault step by step as instructed.
High voltage standing wave ratio alarm
1) Check the connecting cable between TRX and CDU. If there is poor contact or any
broken point, replace the cable.
2) Check whether the antenna is installed properly.
3) Replace the TRX if the fault still can not be removed.
Power alarm

2-42

User Manual
M900/M1800 Base Transceiver Station (BTS30)

BTS Maintenance
Chapter 2 Fault Analysis and Location

1) Check whether there is power supply alarm.


2) Check whether there is any clock alarm and whether the clock line between TRB
and CMB is normal.
3) Check whether TRX is firmly inserted.
4) Replace the TRX if the fault still can not be removed.
Temperature alarm
1) Check the cooling fan. Replace it if it stops running.
2) Check whether the ambient temperature is too high.
3) Replace the TRX if the fault still can not be removed.
Clock alarm
1) Check whether TRX is in good contact with the backplane. Make sure that it is
firmly inserted.
2) Replace the TRX. If the problem still exists, replace the backplane.
If all TRXs of this cabinet give clock alarms, then go as follows:
z

Check whether the wiring is correct. If not, modify the wiring as required. Check
whether there is any broken line.

Check whether TDU module and the wire are properly connected and whether
there is any fault in TDU module. If there is, replace the TDU module.

Check whether there is fault in TMU module. If there is, replace the TMU
module.

Phase-locked loop alarm


1) Check whether there is any clock alarm. If there is, refer to section IV, 'Clock alarm',
to solve the problem.
2) Check whether there is any power supply alarm. If there is, refer to section XI,
'(Power supply alarm', to solve the problem.
3) Check whether the data configuration of this cell is consistent with the attributes of
this cell (GSM900 or DCS1800).
4) Replace the TRX if the fault still can not be removed.
DSP alarm
1) Check whether there is any clock alarm. If there is, refer to section IV, 'Clock alarm',
to solve the problem.
2) Check whether TRX is firmly inserted.

2-43

User Manual
M900/M1800 Base Transceiver Station (BTS30)

BTS Maintenance
Chapter 2 Fault Analysis and Location

3) Check whether the indicators on TRX panel are flashing alternatively. If they stop
flashing or they are not on, reactivate TRX software or reset the TRX.
4) Replace TRX if the fault still can not be removed.
FPGA alarm
1) Check clock alarm.
2) Reset TRX.
3) Replace TRX if the fault still can not be removed.
FIFO alarm
1) Check whether there is any clock alarm. If there is, refer to section IV, 'Clock alarm',
to solve the problem.
2) Check whether TRX is firmly inserted.
3) Replace TRX.
Frequency hopping bus alarm
1) Check whether there is any clock alarm. If there is, refer to section IV, 'Clock alarm',
to solve the problem.
2) Check whether there is any DSP alarm. If there is, refer to section VI, 'DSP alarm',
to solve the problem.
3) Check whether there is any FPGA alarm. If there is, refer to section VII, 'FPGA
alarm', to solve the problem.
4) Replace TRX if the fault still can not be removed.
DBUS bus alarm
1) Check whether data configuration is correct and whether the cell is in service.
2) Check whether the wiring is correct.
3) Check whether TMU module is in good contact with the backplane.
4) Check whether there is any fault in TMU module.
5) Check whether E1 line connection is proper.
6) Check whether the TRX and the backplane are well connected.
7) Check whether TRX is inserted into the right slot.
8) Replace TRX if the fault still can not be removed.
Power supply alarm

2-44

User Manual
M900/M1800 Base Transceiver Station (BTS30)

BTS Maintenance
Chapter 2 Fault Analysis and Location

1) Check whether the power is switched off.


2) Check the backplane wiring.
3) Replace TRX.
TRX no power output
1) Check whether there is any clock alarm. If there is, refer to section IV, 'Clock alarm',
to solve the problem.
2) Check whether there is any phase lock loop alarm. If there is, refer to section V,
'Phase-locked loop alarm', to solve the problem.
3) Check whether there is any DSP alarm. If there is, refer to section VI, 'DSP alarm',
to solve the problem.
4) Check whether there is any power supply alarm. If there is, refer to section XI,
'Power supply alarm', to solve the problem.
5) Check whether TRX is firmly inserted.
6) Replace TRX if the fault still can not be removed.

2-45

Anda mungkin juga menyukai